5734 lines
337 KiB
Plaintext
5734 lines
337 KiB
Plaintext
PETER PUT BACK INTO SHORTS
|
||
|
||
CHAPTER ONE
|
||
|
||
"Jenkins, go to your dormitory now!"
|
||
|
||
Peter looked out of the dormitory window that overlooked the quadrangle,
|
||
thinking of the last words the headmaster had shouted at him. He had never
|
||
seen Dr. Edwardes look so angry. True, Peter had been up in front of the
|
||
head five times in the last three weeks. Surely he hadn't done any thing
|
||
really serious, he thought to himself, smiling as he remembered how he had
|
||
been caught by Mr. Pryce, the History master, flicking food from his fork
|
||
at Bill Marsh, the Form swot, at lunchtime. That wasn't really serious;
|
||
just a bit of fun, but the head had seemed furious.
|
||
|
||
Peter started worrying about why he had been sent to his room.The
|
||
headmaster had not told him to prepare for a caning, he thought, but Peter
|
||
wondered whether he should change into his sports shorts and gym vest. That
|
||
was the clothing the headmaster insisted a boy must wear when receiving the
|
||
cane. He had never been caned by the new headmaster but he had heard from
|
||
one of the fifth form boys that he really laid it on.
|
||
|
||
Dr. Edwardes was also looking out of the window. He was wondering just
|
||
what to do with Peter Jenkins. Why the boy was almost impossible. You would
|
||
think that a fourth form boy would behave better than this. After all, the
|
||
boy is fifteen years of age; and yet he behaves no better than the little
|
||
boys in the Preparatory School next door. "I wonder?", he said to himself
|
||
as he walked over to the phone on his antique desk, which he had brought
|
||
with him from his last school. "I think it might just work..". He picked up
|
||
the receiver and dialed. "Hello Matron," he said, with a hint of a smile
|
||
playing on his usually stern face, "I have an idea how we can teach young
|
||
Master Jenkins some common sense".
|
||
|
||
Peter sat on his bed. "I wonder how long I am to wait.", he thought to
|
||
himself. After all hadn't he already been in the dorm for over an hour?.
|
||
Looking at his hands as he nervously wrung them in his lap he hoped that
|
||
the Headmaster had not contacted his parents. Not that his mother would say
|
||
anything, but his father would be absolutely livid. He could just imagine
|
||
what would happen, he thought as he scratched off a little mud that had got
|
||
on to the bottom of his trousers when he had run back from the Headmasters'
|
||
study. He did not like what he was thinking. He knew that his father would
|
||
probably use that new birch that had been in his fathers den for months
|
||
just waiting to be used. And the old one had hurt badly enough.
|
||
|
||
"Ah, there you are, Jenkins.", Matron said as Peter looked up at the door.
|
||
"The headmaster says that you are to go to tea now,and return here when you
|
||
have finished.". "And no flicking food at people either.", Peter heard her
|
||
shout as he went down to the dining hall.
|
||
|
||
Peter left the dining hall having only picked at his food. He still did
|
||
not know what was going to be done to him and this made him feel very
|
||
scared. Possibly he might get the cane, but why was it taking so long. The
|
||
old Headmaster would have you in without any delay, tell you why you were
|
||
to be punished and how many you would receive, and then you would get it.
|
||
And the old Head really knew how to lay it on as well. Why, the last time
|
||
Peter had been caned he had had the marks for three weeks!.
|
||
|
||
Peter entered the Dormitory. Standing by his bed were the Headmaster,
|
||
Matron and Peters' Form Master, Mr. Walters. "Come here Jenkins", said the
|
||
Headmaster as Mr. Walters left the room, "I have something to say to you.".
|
||
Peter walked over to the bed very sheepishly, noticing at the same time
|
||
that there was a large brown parcel at the end of his bed.
|
||
|
||
"As you insist on behaving in a thoroughly irresponsible and childish
|
||
manner I have decided there is only one course of action to be taken," said
|
||
the Headmaster angrily to Peter as he arrived at the bedside, "and that
|
||
is", he said moving to the end of Peters' bed, "that if you insist on
|
||
behaving like a child then you will be treated as a child!", he said,
|
||
throwing open the parcel that Peter had noticed just a few moments before.
|
||
At first all that Peter noticed was a blazer the same color as his own,but
|
||
then he noticed the badge on the blazer pocket. It was the badge of the
|
||
Prep school!. And there was a cap to go with it too!. "Oh sir, no!" cried
|
||
Peter as he realized his fate,"please don't make me wear that!" the horror
|
||
sounding in his voice. But Peters' died with shock as he saw what was under
|
||
the blazer that Matron was now hanging in his wardrobe, four pairs of short
|
||
grey school trousers, as well as six pairs of long grey socks and two ties,
|
||
all in Belmont Court Preparatory School colors. There were even two pairs
|
||
of white short cricket trousers that only junior prep schoolboys wore. "You
|
||
will wear this uniform until you prove to me that you can conduct yourself
|
||
in a proper, and orderly manner and not like an undisciplined five year
|
||
old" said The Headmaster, "and to ensure that you do, I am instructing
|
||
Matron to relieve you of your uniform and all the other long trousers you
|
||
have, to be kept in safe keeping until such time as you can prove your
|
||
conduct. You will now get changed and report to me in one half hour."
|
||
|
||
When the Headmaster had left Peter sat down on the bed and sobbed. "Its
|
||
not fair, it's just not fair. I can't wear those",he said indicating the
|
||
short trousers laying on the bed,"everyone will laugh at me." still
|
||
sobbing. "You should have thought of that before you started," said Matron
|
||
in an consoling tone, "but never mind, it will only be for a short while if
|
||
you set your mind to it. Come on now, let's get you changed and over to the
|
||
Headmasters' study before you get into more trouble for being late." With
|
||
that she took all of Peters' St. Matthews uniform out of the wardrobe and
|
||
put three pairs of the other trousers onto the shelf. She waited for Peter
|
||
to take off his blazer and long trousers. When he had done so she left the
|
||
dormitory, with his clothes in her arms. When she had left Peter suddenly
|
||
had a funny thought. "At least I will not have to wear any silly grey
|
||
shirts.", but at that moment Matron returned to the dorm and said, "I have
|
||
already laid out your shirts in the cupboard, so hurry up you naughty
|
||
little boy."
|
||
|
||
"Why did she have to call me that." thought Peter as tears started
|
||
streaming down his cheeks again. "Oh well, I suppose I had better get
|
||
dressed," he thought, sadly."
|
||
|
||
First of all he took off his shoes and socks. The socks he put into the
|
||
bottom of the wardrobe, and wondered how long it would be before he wore
|
||
them again. Then he took a pair of those nasty long socks and started to
|
||
put them on. He had always thought them horrible in his old school as he
|
||
was always being told off for having them down around his ankles. "I had
|
||
better make sure that I keep them pulled up or I'll be kept like this
|
||
forever," he muttered, "because I cannot keep my self looking smart.". He
|
||
pulled them up over his knees and turned the tops with the two blue bands
|
||
over and checked them to make sure they were level. Then he slowly picked
|
||
up the trousers. They were lined in white,just like the ones he had worn
|
||
five years ago. He'd had no idea that they were even made in his size. He
|
||
pulled them up over his now bare thighs. He looked down and noticed they
|
||
did not even come down halfway to his knees. Oh, how was he going to
|
||
survive all the taunts?
|
||
|
||
When he had changed his shirt and tie and put his shoes and new blazer on
|
||
he turned round to face Matron. She looked at him and thought that, apart
|
||
from being just a little taller than her own son, how similar they were.
|
||
Part of that was probably the fact that Peter was quite small for his age
|
||
and that, more than anything else accounted for his looking like a nine
|
||
year old."Right, you had better be off and report to the Headmaster," she
|
||
told Peter, and as he went to leave she said, "and don't forget your cap!".
|
||
"Oh why do I have to wear that!" thought Peter sadly.
|
||
|
||
Peter made his way to the Headmasters study without being seen, and
|
||
knocked quietly on the door. "Who is it?" a voice called from inside.
|
||
"Jenkins sir, " replied Peter, a little nervously. "Come in Jenkins and be
|
||
quick about it" the voice ordered. He opened the door and saw, in the
|
||
office, two people."Ah Jenkins, " Edwardes said as Peter approached the
|
||
desk, "This is Mr. Thomas, the Headmaster of Belmont Court." Peter said
|
||
good afternoon to the man, feeling almost naked in his short grey trousers.
|
||
"Well take off your cap boy, you're not outside now!" ordered Mr. Jenkins.
|
||
Peter meekly removed his cap and put it in his pocket. "I have arranged
|
||
with Mr. Thomas that on Sunday you are to go with his third form pupils on
|
||
an outing to the Nature reserve. You be outside the school gates at ten
|
||
o'clock, with a packed lunch that cook will provide for you, is that
|
||
understood? Well boy, is that understood, I said?" Peter looked up thinking
|
||
how humiliating it would be, going through the town with a bunch of nine
|
||
year olds, especially with him dressed the same way. "Yes sir " was all
|
||
Peter could say, looking down at the floor.
|
||
|
||
The Headmaster was speaking again. "While you are on this trip you will be
|
||
treated as one of Mr. Thomas' boys. Any disobedience and you will be
|
||
punished accordingly." "Oh no! " thought Peter,the shock showing on his
|
||
face. Pupils at Belmont Court, when punished, were taken out in front of
|
||
the class and spanked! Right there in front of all of those boys! How could
|
||
he face it!
|
||
|
||
He thought to himself that he would definitely have to behave himself. Dr.
|
||
Edwardes turned to Peter and said, "You may feel that having to dress like
|
||
a Prep school boy is punishment enough, but there is still the question of
|
||
your behavior at lunchtime to be settled.". "Come here Jenkins!". The
|
||
Headmaster brought a chair over from against the wall and set it in the
|
||
middle of the room, and sat down.
|
||
|
||
Peter was certainly not prepared for what happened next. He was paralyzed
|
||
with fear as Dr. Edwardes began to undo his shorts.Peter pleaded and cried
|
||
with the Headmaster but, even with the Head of Belmont Court facing them he
|
||
soon found himself spreadeagled across Dr. Edwardes knees. Then to Peters'
|
||
horror, he felt his pants being pulled down too. Within seconds he was
|
||
having his bottom spanked both loud and hard and, even though Peter was
|
||
trying to salvage some sort of dignity in front of Mr.Thomas by 'taking it
|
||
like a man' he failed and, overcome by this traumatic turn of events, he
|
||
bawled his head off.
|
||
|
||
Dr. Edwardes indicated that, should there be any more bad behavior, he
|
||
could expect more of the same. Peter was then told to go and stand in the
|
||
corner of the room with his trousers and underpants down and to stay there
|
||
until he had repented his mis-deeds of the day. Peter shuffled over to the
|
||
corner and stood there, facing the wall. His cheeks were glowing from the
|
||
spanking they had just received and were more than a little sore. Peter
|
||
fought to control the sobs that were shaking his body. "If only I could do
|
||
something to show that I will be good" thought Peter,but as fast as he
|
||
thought it he knew that his past indiscretions would take more to erase
|
||
than just words.
|
||
|
||
After 15 minutes Peter was told he could get dressed. He pulled his
|
||
underpants up slowly, rubbing his bottom at the same time. It was very
|
||
sore, but then what could you expect, after the tanning it had received. He
|
||
re fastened his shorts and when he had pulled up his socks he turned
|
||
around.
|
||
|
||
"I'm sorry sir" he said to the Headmaster, in a voice so low it was almost
|
||
a whisper. "What!" said Dr. Edwardes, sternly, "I can't hear you, speak up
|
||
lad!". Peter raised his head and slightly louder said, "I'm very sorry sir,
|
||
I won't do it again sir". The Head looked at him and told him to return to
|
||
the dorm. As he watched Peter leave the room he thought to himself, only
|
||
time will tell.
|
||
|
||
Peter walked slowly back to the dorm. He thought about the paddling he had
|
||
just received and what everyone in the school would think when they saw him
|
||
and knew he was in for a lot of ridicule and taunting. Shrugging to himself
|
||
he opened the door.
|
||
|
||
"See, I told you he was!"
|
||
|
||
Peter looked at the boy who had just called out to everyone in the room.
|
||
"I said he was dressed like a Preppie and I was right, wasn't I?". The
|
||
speaker was Steven Jones, one of the boys from the dormitory next door.
|
||
Peter looked around the room and saw that everyone in his form was in the
|
||
dorm and they were all staring at him in his little boys' clothes. He felt
|
||
very uncomfortable. Suddenly Bill Marsh, the boy who Peter had been
|
||
flicking food at lunch started chanting, "Peter's a Preppie, Peter's a
|
||
Preppie", "Just look at his little uniform, Who's a naughty little boy
|
||
then?". Everyone joined in the taunting and Peter knew this was only the
|
||
start. The taunting and the tanning all became too much for him and for the
|
||
third time today he started to cry. He ignored the jeers of "Little blubber
|
||
boy" and just hoped that he could convince the Head that he could behave
|
||
quickly.
|
||
CHAPTER TWO
|
||
|
||
The next morning, Peter went down to the showers early. He had slept very
|
||
little and when he looked at his watch and saw that it was nearly seven
|
||
o'clock he decided to get up. He hoped he would be able to get dressed and
|
||
down to breakfast before the rest of the school came down to the dining
|
||
hall. He wondered if any of the tutors knew what had happened and whether
|
||
they would try to embarrass him in front of all his school chums. He did
|
||
hope not.It had been bad enough last night with everyone making fun of him.
|
||
The last thing he needed was the other boys thinking that if the teachers
|
||
could poke fun at him, so could they.
|
||
|
||
As Peter was showering he thought of how he looked in the uniform. Only
|
||
two things consoled him. One was that, as he was small for his age, only
|
||
four foot ten inches, he looked like a senior Prep school boy. At least if
|
||
anyone who did not know him saw him, they wouldn't think anything of it.
|
||
Also, he had very little body hair. He had never really considered this
|
||
before but,looking down at his legs he noticed that there was hardly a hair
|
||
on them, only a few at the very top of his legs, and they could hardly be
|
||
seen, they were so fine. Why he didn't even have very much pubic hair,
|
||
nowhere near as much as most boys of his age.Considering his present
|
||
predicament he felt quite pleased with himself. At least it wasn't as if he
|
||
had hairy legs. That *would *make it too obvious that there was something
|
||
strange about his clothing.
|
||
|
||
He returned to his room. No one was awake. Peter hoped that no one would
|
||
wake up until he had a chance to get dressed and,if possible, get down to
|
||
breakfast. Peter wondered just how long the Headmaster intended keeping him
|
||
in these clothes. He hoped not long, as he took off his bathrobe, folded it
|
||
up and put it away in the wardrobe. He thought it silly that any change of
|
||
clothing had to be put away before putting on the other clothes,but
|
||
admitted to himself that at least it kept everything tidy.Putting on his
|
||
vest he thought of his bedroom at home. Until he had gone to school his
|
||
mother had always tidied up after him, but now he always kept his room
|
||
clean, even to putting his toys away when he had finished with them.
|
||
Pulling on his white underpants he remembered his ordeal in the Heads'
|
||
study the previous day.How humiliated he felt when he had his short
|
||
trousers and underpants taken down like a little boy of six, and in front
|
||
of a stranger!
|
||
|
||
Peter put on his shirt and tie and frowned. If only Matron had not got him
|
||
these grey shirts. None of the boys at the school wore them and it only
|
||
helped to Peter the obvious fact that he was, to all intents and purposes,
|
||
a little schoolboy. Peter put on his shoes and socks, and then the
|
||
trousers. Peter found it strange that he had secretly enjoyed wearing short
|
||
trousers again. In fact he found that he was beginning to feel quite proud
|
||
of himself. He wasn't going to let all the taunts and jibes from the other
|
||
fellows get him down. Feeling happier than he had since yesterday afternoon
|
||
he threw on his Belmont Ct. blazer,grabbed his school cap from the shelf,
|
||
put it on and walked out of the dorm. He skipped over to the dining hall,
|
||
grinning all the way. Perhaps it wasn't going to be too bad after all.
|
||
|
||
Peter managed to get through breakfast quickly and the few remarks made to
|
||
him didn't upset him as much as he had expected. He noticed quite a few of
|
||
the younger boys looking at him and giggling amongst themselves. Peter
|
||
realized this was probably due to the fact that would not have long been
|
||
out of short trousers themselves and they found it funny that a boy older
|
||
than them was wearing short pants still.
|
||
|
||
The first lesson that morning was History. Peter had always liked the
|
||
subject. He loved learning about things that happened a long time ago and
|
||
in far away places. More important though,was the fact that most of his
|
||
friends were in his history group. Peter turned in his seat and looked at
|
||
the boy sat next to him.Geoff Duncan was one of Peters' oldest and best
|
||
friends. They had gone to the same prep school and when Geoffs' parents
|
||
went abroad on business, he usually stayed at Peters' home for the hols.
|
||
Peter had noticed Geoff glancing at his shorts off and on during the lesson
|
||
and wondered what his friend was thinking. He did hope that Geoff would not
|
||
try to steer clear of him because of what some the other boys might think
|
||
and say.
|
||
|
||
Peter turned back to his books. The class were studying the Carthaginian
|
||
Wars, a particularly bloody time in history. Peter wondered what it would
|
||
have been like to be a soldier in those days. His mind had just begun to
|
||
wander when he was suddenly jolted back to reality. A hand was feeling
|
||
under the edge of his shorts! Peter turned and looked at Geoff out of the
|
||
corner of his eye. Geoff was leaning forward over his book, looking very
|
||
studious, but all the time he was putting his hand further up the leg of
|
||
Peters' trousers. They had often done it at prep school,but when the boys
|
||
went into longs of course it had stopped. By now Geoff was fingering the
|
||
elastic leg band of Peters' Y-fronts.Peter felt a stirring in his pants.
|
||
|
||
Just then the bell went. The hand brushed lightly over his willy and was
|
||
swiftly withdrawn from Peters' shorts and the boys stood up, took their
|
||
books to the front of the room and were dismissed.
|
||
|
||
Outside, in the quadrangle, Geoff stood next to Peter and said in a low
|
||
voice, "You didn't mind me feeling up your trousers, did you? ", he
|
||
enquired, a serious look on his face. "It was just that we used to do it
|
||
all the time and I did not know whether you might think it silly of me
|
||
now". Peter turned to his friend and put his arm round his shoulder, and
|
||
smiled.
|
||
|
||
"You know," said Peter, "in a way I'm quite glad you did" giving his
|
||
friends' shoulder a little squeeze. "I was starting to wonder if you would
|
||
even talk to me. You seemed to me to be wondering if you should have
|
||
anything to do with me the way you kept looking at my legs." Peter
|
||
deliberately didn't mention his shorts in case he embarrassed his friend.
|
||
|
||
"No all I was thinking was what you might do if I started feeling you like
|
||
we used to when we were younger." said Geoff,now a little less apprehensive
|
||
than he had just been. "I didn't know whether you would hit me or tell old
|
||
Prycey!"
|
||
|
||
Peter turned and looked at his friend. Geoff was the same age as Peter, in
|
||
fact they had the same birthday. He was also about the same size as Peter,
|
||
only about half an inch taller. This had been one of the main reasons they
|
||
had become such good friends.Geoff had never been any good at fighting, and
|
||
because of his size, had been picked on quite a lot by the other boys at
|
||
the school, most of them being three or four inches taller than them both.
|
||
Peter had helped him out of more than a few scrapes and gradually they had
|
||
developed a firm friendship.
|
||
|
||
"You know," said Geoff seriously, "I think you look very smart in that
|
||
uniform, Pete. Most of the others think you look kind of silly but I
|
||
don't." he said to his chum. "In fact," he whispered to his friend, "I wish
|
||
I could wear shorts as well, these long trousers itch like hell and I'm
|
||
always getting told off by Matron when I fall over and tear the knees.".
|
||
Peter looked at his friend. He knew what Geoff meant. He was a good enough
|
||
sort but he did keep tripping over things. In fact it was only two days ago
|
||
that he'd been running across the quad on his way to tea, when he had
|
||
tripped on his own shoe lace.
|
||
|
||
But there was also something else about Geoff, thought Peter as he stared
|
||
at his friends' face, something he could not quite figure out. There was
|
||
almost a hint of jealousy showing in his eyes, and Peter wondered if he
|
||
might just know what it was. "Is that the only reason?" asked Peter, with a
|
||
knowing look in his eye.
|
||
|
||
"Wellll," replied Geoff, bashfully, his cheeks reddening just slightly as
|
||
he realized what his friend meant, "I was just thinking what fun it would
|
||
be if we could do what we used to do before". Peter remembered. They used
|
||
to sit at the back of the class feeling up each others trouser legs and
|
||
playing with each others' willies. He remembered that, although they were
|
||
supposed to wear underpants at all times, they used to conveniently forget
|
||
to put them on so that it was easier to get hold of each other.
|
||
|
||
He also remembered that Frank Smith, another boy in their class used to
|
||
join in with them when they used to watch the cricket matches at their old
|
||
school. Frank was also at St. Matthews, and Peter wondered if he would like
|
||
to get back into shorts and play around like they did when they were
|
||
younger. Peter said to Geoff, "I wonder what Frank thinks of me wearing
|
||
these?" he said, looking at his shorts in a wistful sort of way. "He thinks
|
||
you're a lucky beggar, even if you do have to wear them! I know, he told me
|
||
so this morning when he saw you in the dining hall.", his friend replied,
|
||
wondering why he'd asked. "Come with me, I've got something to show you"
|
||
said Peter as he pulled his friend towards his dorm. "I think you might
|
||
like this".
|
||
|
||
When they got to the dorm, Peter opened his wardrobe and pointed to the
|
||
shelf. "What do you think of those?" he said, as he pointed to the pile of
|
||
short grey trousers on the shelf.
|
||
|
||
"Would you like to try a pair on? If they fit you you could have them, and
|
||
then when we go out on Sunday you could wear them under your longs and we
|
||
could find somewhere quiet and, Oh", Peter suddenly exclaimed, and he told
|
||
his friend what Dr. Edwardes had arranged for him. "Oh how awful,"
|
||
exclaimed his chum, "I think that's a rotten thing to make you do, and he
|
||
said you would be spanked if you were bad or anything?, in front of all
|
||
those little boys?, How horrid!", and Peter agreed with him.
|
||
|
||
"Anyway," Peter quickly changed the subject, "nobodies' likely to come in
|
||
here yet, why don't you try them on and see if they fit you " he suggested
|
||
as he gave Geoff one of the pairs of grey shorts from the shelf. Geoff took
|
||
them and, looking around to make sure nobody was coming, slipped his longs
|
||
off and was soon stood next to Peter in them. "How do they look?" asked
|
||
Geoff, turning round in front of his friend so that he could have a good
|
||
look.
|
||
|
||
Peter looked at his friends new trousers. He knelt down on the floor and
|
||
looked up the legs, checking to make sure that there was enough room to
|
||
slip his hand in. "I think they look very good" Peter told his chum, as he
|
||
stood up. "How do they feel?" Geoff told him that they felt great. "They're
|
||
yours then, o.k?" "Do you really mean it?" asked Geoff, amazed at his luck,
|
||
hoping that his friend was not just joking with him. Peter told him that he
|
||
was not joking, and in fact, if Frank wanted to, he could have a pair as
|
||
well. "We could have a jolly good lot of fun then couldn't we eh?" asked
|
||
Peter. "You bet!" replied Geoff, a smile on his face.
|
||
|
||
Just then the bell for the end of the break went, and Geoff hurriedly
|
||
slipped his longs on over his shorts. He would enjoy knowing that under his
|
||
long trousers he had something only he and Peter knew about. This gave him
|
||
a feeling of being very naughty and he was thoroughly enjoying it.
|
||
|
||
That evening, as Peter was getting ready for bed, Geoff was in his own
|
||
dormitory, doing the same. He had forgotten he still had his new short
|
||
trousers on. He was talking to the boy in the next bed as he started taking
|
||
his trousers off. He suddenly remembered the shorts and turned around,
|
||
unzipped the shorts as well and slipped both pairs of trousers off at once.
|
||
He glanced round to see if anyone had noticed, but everyone was still
|
||
busily undressing, ready to go to bed. Geoff decided that from now on he
|
||
was going to have to be more careful when he was wearing his new short grey
|
||
trousers. He carefully pulled them out of his longs and hid them at the
|
||
back of his shoes, in the bottom of his wardrobe.
|
||
CHAPTER THREE
|
||
|
||
The next morning, being Saturday, the rest of the boys in Peters' dorm
|
||
went into town. Peter was not invited and he knew why. They did not want
|
||
what looked like a little prep school boy tagging along with them, that
|
||
would be too much, so Peter decided that today he would have to have a word
|
||
with Frank.
|
||
|
||
He found Frank at lunch time. While he was in the queue for food he looked
|
||
round and found Frank staring at him, or to be more precise, his trousers.
|
||
When Peter had finished collecting his dinner, he walked over to Franks'
|
||
table and sat down opposite him. He was glad that there were not many
|
||
people in to lunch today, and that they had the table all to themselves.
|
||
They sat and exchanged news for a while before Peter told Frank that he
|
||
wanted to show him something. Frank asked what it was, but all Peter told
|
||
him was to meet him at one o'clock in his dorm. Frank agreed, and when
|
||
Peter had finished eating he rushed off to find Geoff. Quickly he told him
|
||
what was arranged and told him to come prepared. Geoff grinned and said of
|
||
course he would be prepared, try and stop him. Peter went back to his dorm.
|
||
|
||
Meanwhile, as Geoff was getting his shorts from their hiding place and
|
||
slipping them on under his long trousers, Frank was wondering what it was
|
||
that could be so important that Peter wanted to show him. He could only
|
||
think that Peter had received something special from home. He liked Peter,
|
||
and although he was sorry that Peter had been made to wear little boys'
|
||
school uniform, he secretly wished that it had happened to him. Shorts were
|
||
a lot more fun, he'd decided, than long trousers, and he smiled when he
|
||
thought of all the things that Peter, Geoff and himself had got up to when
|
||
they were younger. Not that he wasn't having fun in this school though. He
|
||
thought about the football match last week. He had been one of the boys
|
||
selected to go with the fifth form football team to help in the dressing
|
||
room. One of the older boys, a reserve, had stayed behind in the dressing
|
||
room with him, and had allowed Frank to watch as he had rubbed his cock. He
|
||
had seen a lot of creamy stuff shoot out of it and, when the older boy had
|
||
seen how surprised the youngster had been, he had sat Frank on his lap,
|
||
unzipped his fly and taken his cock out and shown him what to do. Frank had
|
||
seen the older boy since then but he never showed any sign of recognition.
|
||
Frank looked at his watch and saw the time. "Oh well" he thought to
|
||
himself, " I'd better go and see what it is that Peter wants to show me.
|
||
|
||
Geoff got to Peters' dorm he could hear from the voices inside that Frank
|
||
had already arrived. By the sound of it, Peter had already shown him the
|
||
shorts, but was having trouble getting Frank to try some on. Well there was
|
||
only one thing for it, he would just have to convince Frank himself.
|
||
Looking up and down the corridor to made sure no one was about, he slipped
|
||
his longs off and after rolling them up and pushing them up underneath the
|
||
back of his blazer he strolled into Peters room. He saw the look of
|
||
amazement on Franks' face. He must have thought he'd walked all the way
|
||
across the school like that! Oh well, if it made Frank less apprehensive,
|
||
what did he care?.
|
||
|
||
The two boys finally convinced Frank to try a pair, assuring him that no
|
||
one would see him, and that they would barricade the door so that nobody
|
||
could get in. When they had done that, Geoff knelt down in front of Frank
|
||
and undid his trousers and slipped them down his legs. Frank lifted his
|
||
feet so that his friend could remove them completely. The two boys in
|
||
shorts could see that their friend was as excited about this as they were
|
||
by the little bulge in his Y-fronts. Peter passed Geoff a pair of the short
|
||
trousers from the shelf and in next to no time the boy had put them on his
|
||
friend. As he zipped up the fly he gave his friend a pat on the front of
|
||
his shorts. He knew that within a very short while there would be three
|
||
pairs of hands in more places than the outside of three pairs of shorts.
|
||
|
||
The boys soon ended up on Peters' bed, reliving their earlier days. by the
|
||
time it was time to go down to tea, Frank had shown them both what he had
|
||
learned the week before and it was three very exhausted little boys who
|
||
went down to tea. All three in short grey trousers, except that two of them
|
||
had longs on over the top. Peter smiled. They had a secret they would share
|
||
for a long time, and rekindled a friendship that would last even longer. As
|
||
they walked to the dining hall Peter thought that he must ask his parents
|
||
if he could have his two friends to stay for the hols. They could go
|
||
camping on that little island he had found along the river from his
|
||
fathers' house. Such a sweet little island too, totally out of view of
|
||
everything except the sky and the birds. What fun three little boys could
|
||
have!
|
||
|
||
CHAPTER FOUR
|
||
|
||
The next morning Peter woke up at eight o'clock. He jumped out of bed and
|
||
rushed down to the washroom. He did not want to be late today! He washed so
|
||
vigorously that, by the time he had finished, he glowed bright pink.
|
||
Returning to his room he took off his pajamas and put them away. He looked
|
||
down at his legs and thought of all the times he had wished that he would
|
||
grow some hair on them, thinking now how much better they looked without
|
||
it. He slipped on his vest and pants and sat down on the bed. Pulling his
|
||
socks up as far as they would go, he hoped that they would stay up,
|
||
thinking what might happen if the teacher took it into his head that Peter
|
||
was an untidy little scruff. That might be just the excuse he would need to
|
||
teach him a lesson, Peter thought wryly to himself, checking that his socks
|
||
were straight and that the two blue bands were level.
|
||
|
||
Peter had decided that he would not wear the shorts he would be going out
|
||
in down to breakfast. He wanted to be as smart as possible when he had to
|
||
go out with those younger boys, and if he wore his shorts to breakfast they
|
||
would be all wrinkled from his sitting down. No it would be better if he
|
||
had breakfast and then came back and changed. He put on the trousers he had
|
||
worn for the past two days. Then putting on his shirt and tie (making sure
|
||
that the knot was tight!) and slipping on his shoes, he looked out the
|
||
window. Even though it was March it was still very sharp first thing in the
|
||
morning so, rather than risk getting his blazer dirty, he put on his St.
|
||
Matthews pullover. He felt sure that nobody would object, after all he was
|
||
only wearing it to go to the dining hall.
|
||
|
||
While he was eating breakfast, the cook came over to him and told him that
|
||
he was to collect his lunch bag at a quarter to ten. He glanced up at the
|
||
clock on the wall. It was already twenty five past nine! He quickly
|
||
finished his breakfast and dashed up to his room. After quickly combing his
|
||
hair he grabbed his blazer, and making sure he had done all the buttons up
|
||
his pulled his cap on his head and ran out of the dorm.
|
||
|
||
He had just reached the front gate as the group of boys from Belmont Ct.
|
||
arrived. They were told to stop and a man walked over to Peter and enquired
|
||
if he was Peter Jenkins. "Yes" gasped Peter, trying to get his breath back.
|
||
"Yes what?!" demanded the man staring down at Peter,"Do they not teach you
|
||
manners at school boy?!". "Sorry sir, yes sir" was all the boy could
|
||
stammer, realizing that he had not started the day off very well at all.
|
||
"That's better, but just remember,I do not like rude little boys," he said,
|
||
"or scruffy ones either!" pointing down at Peters' left sock which had
|
||
fallen down to his ankle as he had run up to the gate. "Smarten yourself up
|
||
and go to the front of the line where I can keep an eye on you." ordered
|
||
the teacher.
|
||
|
||
When Peter had pulled his socks up and stood next to the young boy at the
|
||
head of the line, the teacher told the boys to move off. "That's Mr. Beech,
|
||
our form master," whispered the boy next to Peter, "you'd better be careful
|
||
what you do today 'cos he's told us if you're naughty he's going to smack
|
||
your bottom just like he does ours. My name's David, what's yours?"
|
||
enquired the boy. Peter told him his name and the two boys talked together
|
||
all the way to the nature reserve. David asked him why he was wearing their
|
||
school uniform, so Peter had to tell him all about what had happened.
|
||
"Gosh, you must have been very naughty!" exclaimed the young boy.
|
||
|
||
By this time they had arrived at the nature reserve. Mr. Beech split the
|
||
boys up into groups of four and gave them each a book of questions that
|
||
they had to answer. He explained that they could find all the answers by
|
||
observing the plants and animals in the sanctuary.
|
||
|
||
Peter's group set off to find the first answer. He was pleased he was in
|
||
the same group as David, and he had discovered that being with the younger
|
||
boys was not as bad as he had thought it would be. The younger boys asked
|
||
him all about what it was like at his school and, between answering the
|
||
questions in his book, he told them all about St. Matthews. When the last
|
||
boy had finished his book, they all headed towards the picnic area where
|
||
Mr. Beech had told them to meet.
|
||
|
||
As they entered the clearing Peter saw the teacher sitting on a tree stump
|
||
talking to the boys who had already arrived. He looked up and indicated
|
||
that they should sit down on the grass in front of him and wait for the
|
||
others.
|
||
|
||
When everyone had returned, Mr. Beech took in all the books and said that
|
||
they would have a quiz now, on the things they had seen and learned around
|
||
the reserve. Peter noticed that most of the questions were fired at him
|
||
but, as he knew most of the answers, this did not worry him much.
|
||
|
||
When the teacher was satisfied the boys had indeed learned something from
|
||
the trip he said that they could eat their lunch. One of the smaller boys
|
||
asked if he could take his blazer off as he felt very warm. Mr. Beech
|
||
smiled and said what a good idea. He told all the boys to remove their caps
|
||
and blazers, as he removed his own jacket. Peter had just started to unwrap
|
||
his sandwiches when he heard the teacher bellow, "And what is the meaning
|
||
of this?!" Peter looked up, thinking one of the boys must have written a
|
||
silly answer in his question book, but as he looked at Mr. Beech he saw the
|
||
man striding over towards him, and he did not look very pleased. "Just what
|
||
do you mean wearing that?" said the teacher, pulling him up by the ear and
|
||
pointing at his pullover. Peter looked down at his jumper. He had forgotten
|
||
to take it off when he had got back to his dormitory. Peter suddenly had a
|
||
very bad feeling about what was going to happen.
|
||
|
||
By now, the teacher was pulling him by the ear out to the front of the
|
||
class. "Well?" the teacher asked, as he sat down on the tree stump, still
|
||
holding on to Peters' now red ear. "Would you kindly explain to me why you
|
||
are wearing a St. Matthews School pullover when you were expressly told you
|
||
were only to wear Belmont Ct. uniform?". Peter tried to explain. "Sir, I'm
|
||
sorry sir I, Ow, my ear sir!, I put it on to go to breakfast and forgot to
|
||
take it off again sir! oh sir, please sir my ear sir." he rambled, the pain
|
||
in his ear causing him more than a little discomfort. "That is not good
|
||
enough, Jenkins, you were told what to wear but you decided to disobey
|
||
those instructions. You are a naughty little boy, what are you?" he
|
||
demanded. "A naughty little boy sir" howled the fifteen year old, as the
|
||
teacher pulled his ear. "And what happens to naughty little boys, eh?"
|
||
enquired the teacher, turning Peter round to face the boys sitting on the
|
||
grass. "Don't know sir" Peter replied, knowing full well what did happen.
|
||
"Don't know sir," roared the teacher, "Don't know sir?! Would one of you
|
||
boys like to inform master Jenkins here what happens to naughty little boys
|
||
who do not do as they are told?" he said, lifting Peters face by his ear
|
||
until he was looking straight at the rest of the group.
|
||
|
||
One young boy raised his hand slowly. "Yes Cook?". "They get their bottom
|
||
smacked sir." replied the little boy, who smiled when the man agreed with
|
||
him. Peter flushed, horrified that he was going to be spanked in front of
|
||
all these little boys, little more than half his age.
|
||
|
||
The boys sat on the grass, looking straight at Peter. They could not
|
||
believe that their form master was going to smack the older boy in front of
|
||
all of them. Of course he had done it to quite a few of them, but that had
|
||
been in a classroom, not out in the open. They did not know about what had
|
||
happened in the Headmasters' Study at St. Matthews, a few days before, but
|
||
Peter knew quite well that the teacher holding him by the ear really did
|
||
intend to spank him, and in front of all the younger boys.
|
||
|
||
Mr. Beech now turned Peter round to face him. Peters' heart sank as the
|
||
man reached out and undid the waistband of his short trousers. He unzipped
|
||
the fly and, taking hold of the leg of the boys' short trousers, pulled
|
||
them down to his ankles. He then laid Peter across his knees and lifted his
|
||
pullover and shirt, and pulled his vest out of his underpants. Peter felt
|
||
the teachers' fingers grab the waistband of his white briefs.
|
||
|
||
"Please no sir!" pleaded Peter, as he tried to stop the teacher from
|
||
removing his final straw of dignity, but the man grabbed hold of Peter's
|
||
wrists with one hand, and jerked the terrified boy's Y-Fronts down to his
|
||
knees with the other.
|
||
|
||
The young boys gasped! They never believed that Mr. Beech would actually
|
||
take Peters' trousers and pants down. They all looked at the boys' naked
|
||
bottom. The sun was shining right down on it through the trees, framing it
|
||
like a picture, the pink cheeks quivering in the cool breeze that blew
|
||
around it. They saw also, because of the angle they were sat at, Peters'
|
||
stiff little cock jutting out from his hairless crotch. Some of the boys
|
||
who had older brothers were quite surprised to see that Peter had no hair
|
||
down there, thinking that all boys Peters' age had at least some growth in
|
||
that area. They had all noticed earlier that the older boy had no hair on
|
||
his legs but would never have thought that the absence of hair would reach
|
||
this far up.
|
||
|
||
By now Mr. Beech was ready to commence serving punishment on Peters'
|
||
posterior. He had pulled the boy right up onto his lap and secured him with
|
||
one arm across his shoulder blades. With the other hand he had spread the
|
||
boys' legs as far as his clothing would allow and was prepared to begin. He
|
||
noticed from the slight red pallor of the boys' cheeks that he had been
|
||
spanked quite recently, and thought to himself wryly that the young boy
|
||
could probably take a few more strokes than an unprepared junior boy could
|
||
manage.
|
||
|
||
He felt the boys bottom,looking for a good place to start. Having found a
|
||
nice soft area, he began.
|
||
|
||
Peter winced as the first blow landed. He hoped that he would not get too
|
||
many. The headmaster had given him twenty, but the man now spanking his
|
||
bare was a lot harder a hitter. Peter flinched as he received another. He
|
||
did not know how much of this he could take. He did not want to start
|
||
bawling in front of all the little kids watching his public humiliation,
|
||
but he knew he would have a hard time controlling his tears with the
|
||
paddling he was receiving. Two more slaps rained down on Peters' smarting
|
||
bottom and the tears began to well up in his eyes. "It's not fair," thought
|
||
Peter to himself, "and all because I forgot to take of this silly
|
||
pullover".
|
||
|
||
Mr. Beech landed an extremely painful whack on the boys' now sore bottom
|
||
and Peter wailed like a baby. He could no longer control himself. He no
|
||
longer had any thought for the boys, watching wide eyed at his beating, but
|
||
just kept bawling and sobbing his eyes out. He tried to stop the teacher
|
||
smacking his rump by putting his hands in the way, but the man just pushed
|
||
them aside and continued with his relentless beating. Finally Peter could
|
||
stand no more and screamed out to the teacher to stop. "Please s.s.s.sir,
|
||
I'm v.very s.s.sorry sir. I pro.promise to be a good b.boy sir, I really
|
||
d.do!" he sobbed. The teacher gave his now raw backside one final slap.
|
||
"Will that teach you to do as you are told?" barked the teacher, resting
|
||
his hand on the boys' warm rump. "Y Yes sir" sniffed Peter, glad that the
|
||
lashing tirade had ended. "Good, then let that be a lesson to you, you
|
||
naughty boy" said the exhausted teacher, punctuating the last two words
|
||
with a slap across the back of each of the boys legs, just above the knees.
|
||
"Well get up and dress yourself then", Mr. Beech told him, "and heaven help
|
||
you if I get any more trouble from you today" he said. "You'd better give
|
||
me that pullover until you return to school," the teacher suggested,
|
||
holding out his hand impatiently. Peter pulled the offending garment over
|
||
his head and handed it to the form master. He noticed the boys who had
|
||
quietly watched the whole thing, sat on the grass. He suddenly realized, as
|
||
he stood rubbing his sore cheeks, that not only had they been treated to
|
||
the sight of his bare bottom while he had actually received the punishment,
|
||
but that he was now giving them a full frontal view too!
|
||
|
||
He fumbled for his underpants, not knowing which way to turn as he
|
||
attempted to get dressed again, a real case of more haste less speed as he
|
||
tried to put a brave face on what had just happened. He pulled his white
|
||
Y-fronts up, carefully tucking in his vest. Reaching down to pull his short
|
||
trousers up he realized that he was no longer acting like a fifteen year
|
||
old, but more like one of the Prep school boys whose company he was now in.
|
||
|
||
When Peter had finally finished dressing and had stopped crying, Mr. Beech
|
||
announced to the boys that he would buy them all an ice cream. Peter wished
|
||
he had brought some money with him so that he could get one too. You can
|
||
imagine his surprise when, at the ice cream van, Mr. Beech presented him
|
||
with a cornet. Peter remembered to thank him and, looking around at the sea
|
||
of little faces, went to stand over by David. The young boy handed Peter
|
||
the sandwiches that he had not had a chance to eat, and asked him if his
|
||
bottom hurt very much. When Peter confided that it did indeed hurt a lot,
|
||
David told him that Mr. Beech was in fact the hardest hitter in the school,
|
||
and that nobody liked being sent to his room if they had been naughty.
|
||
Peter said he could understand that, rubbing his backside through his
|
||
shorts.
|
||
|
||
When everyone had finished their ice creams, Mr. Beech told the boys that
|
||
it was time for them all to return to school. He told the boys to line up
|
||
in twos ready to walk back, Putting Peter in front with David again. Peter
|
||
found it was extremely uncomfortable walking all the way back to the school
|
||
with his cheeks still stinging but was pleased that he was returning to St.
|
||
Matthews School.
|
||
|
||
When they got to the big gates, Peter was a little dismayed to find that
|
||
the Headmaster was waiting for them. He told Peter to go to tea, and as the
|
||
boy walked slowly over to the dining hall he heard the two men discussing
|
||
his behavior, and his spanking. The last words Peter heard the headmaster
|
||
say as he climbed the steps to the hall were, "I can see Peter is going to
|
||
be a little boy in shorts for a long time yet!" Peter frowned.
|
||
|
||
When Peter went into the dining hall he was aware that everyone was
|
||
watching him. He heard the sniggers and caught the sly looks as he queued
|
||
up at the servery. When he had collected his tea he walked over to Geoff
|
||
and Frank, who were sitting together on one of the side tables. He sat
|
||
down, the stinging in his bottom still making the action difficult.
|
||
|
||
Geoff leaned across to Peter and whispered, "We've got our shorts on too,
|
||
under our longs. Frank and I decided that we would wear them as long as you
|
||
have to!" Peter smiled at his friend. He hoped that they would not get
|
||
caught. If they did, it would be obvious where they had got their short
|
||
trousers from, and Peter felt that might cause him even more trouble than
|
||
ever. He told the two boys to be careful not to get caught wearing them.
|
||
They said the would be very careful.
|
||
|
||
Frank noticed that Peter was very aware of everyone staring at him as they
|
||
took their trays back to the hatch. He wondered why the boys were acting so
|
||
strangely. After the first couple of days everyone had seemed to not notice
|
||
Peters' clothing, but now they were all staring again. He looked down at
|
||
Peters' grey shorts and suddenly realized what everyone was looking at. Two
|
||
bright red handprints on the backs of Peters' thighs. So he had been
|
||
smacked after all!
|
||
|
||
When the three boys were alone again, Peter told them all about what
|
||
happened. He dropped his shorts and underpants and showed the boys his red
|
||
bottom. They were amazed at how red it was, and equally shocked at the way
|
||
in which the spanking had been received. Geoff said that he had some cream
|
||
in his room that would ease the stinging, and when he returned with the
|
||
tube of ointment, the two boys gently laid Peter face down on his bed and
|
||
gently smoothed the ointment onto his raw cheeks. Peter soon had a small
|
||
erection from the attention his naked bottom was receiving and he reached
|
||
round and pulled his two friends long trousers down and felt up their
|
||
shorts. They rolled him over and both boys took turns at rubbing Peters'
|
||
stiff little cock while Peter pulled theirs' down the legs of their shorts
|
||
and, with one in each hand, returned the favours the two boys were giving
|
||
him.
|
||
|
||
When all three boys had come, they wiped themselves down with a towel and
|
||
tidied themselves up. As Geoff and Frank left the room, the first few boys
|
||
returned to the dorm.
|
||
|
||
CHAPTER FIVE
|
||
|
||
A few minutes after Peters' friends left, the dorm was full of boys, some
|
||
of them from the other dorms. They started teasing Peter about the slaps on
|
||
his legs and asking him was his bottom sore. A few of the boys were
|
||
taunting him, trying to get him to lower his shorts so that they could have
|
||
a good look. Peter just sat on his bed and wished they would just go away.
|
||
|
||
Suddenly Peter was grabbed from behind. Two of the boys had sneaked around
|
||
behind him and grabbed hold of his arms. The rest of the boys piled on top
|
||
of him and they managed to get him face down on the bed. Peter tried to
|
||
struggle but four of the boys were pinning his arms and legs out so that he
|
||
could not move. He heard someone shout out to one of the boys to get
|
||
Peter's trousers down, and felt an arm reaching under his body, feeling for
|
||
his waistband. The hand lingered for a moment under his willy and squeezed
|
||
it. The boy then moved his hand up and, after undoing the waistband and
|
||
unzipping the fly of Peter's shorts, pulled his arm out from underneath the
|
||
now sobbing boy.
|
||
|
||
Peter pleaded with the other boys to let him go but they all just laughed
|
||
at him. He then felt hands brush his thighs and grab the legs of his
|
||
shorts. In one quick movement his shorts were tugged down to his ankles.
|
||
More hands grabbed hold of the waistband of his underpants, and in moments
|
||
his pants were around his knees, his bottom now bare for all to see.
|
||
|
||
The boys stared at Peter's naked bottom. By now the redness that had been
|
||
there earlier was starting to turn purple with bruising. Some of the boys
|
||
touched it and felt the warmth that was still emanating from it. One boy
|
||
said that Peter must have been slippered for it to leave such bad marks.
|
||
Peter sobbing, told them what had really happened. Some of the boys were
|
||
totally horrified at the thought that a hand could do such damage.
|
||
|
||
Just then Raymond Wilder said that was enough. Wilder, who was a Prefect,
|
||
told everyone to leave the room. Slowly, all the boys filed out, and
|
||
returned to their own rooms. When Peter looked up from his pillow again, he
|
||
saw that Raymond was sat on the next bed. He rose and helped Peter to sit
|
||
up. Raymond apologized for what had happened, and told Peter if he had any
|
||
more trouble, to let him know, and he would sort it out.
|
||
|
||
Ray stared at Peter. He looked so defenseless sat on the edge of his bed
|
||
with his short trousers around his ankles, and his underpants round his
|
||
knees. For some unknown reason, Ray felt as if he wanted to take care of
|
||
the younger boy, He told Peter not to worry, and reassured him that
|
||
everything was going to be all right. He stood up, and after hesitating for
|
||
a couple of moments, took hold of Peter's hands. He lifted Peter to his
|
||
feet and slowly knelt down in front of him.
|
||
|
||
Peter was feeling just a little afraid. What was the prefect going to do
|
||
to him. He hoped he would not be in any more trouble because he would never
|
||
get out of shorts again. He was quite relieved when all the prefect did was
|
||
pull his Y-fronts up and then his trousers. The prefect patted Peter's
|
||
bottom and told him to sit down again. When Peter had done so, Ray put an
|
||
arm around Peter's shoulders and rested his other hand on the boy's knee.
|
||
He told Peter that everything would be all right, and not to worry about
|
||
anything. If any of the boys started picking on him again he was to tell
|
||
Ray and he would make sure it didn't happen again. Ray then got up and left
|
||
the room. He felt, as he had been sitting there, not only his interest in
|
||
the boy arousing. He had never felt this way about one of the junior boys
|
||
before. He knew he would have to find some way of getting to know the
|
||
younger boy better. And if he could, become his friend. He could see in the
|
||
young lad an awful lot of himself. He wistfully hoped that the younger boy
|
||
would feel the same way. He knew that only time would tell.
|
||
|
||
The next few days showed a marked improvement in Peter's behavior. No
|
||
longer was he boisterous or unruly. He was in fact very quiet and
|
||
withdrawn. He said very little and just got on with his work. He was trying
|
||
as hard as he could to be good. He had been taunted a few times by the
|
||
other boys in his dorm, but he had got used to it. He thought once or twice
|
||
about telling Ray about it but he very rarely saw the other boy. When he
|
||
did see him, Ray was usually with at least one or two of the other
|
||
perfects.
|
||
|
||
Peter tried as much as possible to stay out of the way of the prefects
|
||
because he had earned himself a bit of a reputation for getting into
|
||
trouble. On several occasions he had been given lines or even been
|
||
slippered by one or other of the prefects when he had been caught doing
|
||
things he shouldn't have. Although Ray had told him to see him if he had
|
||
any problems, Peter still felt a little wary of the others. He would just
|
||
have to wait until he had the chance to see Ray alone.
|
||
|
||
Frank and Geoff also noticed the change in Peter. He seemed so distant
|
||
from everyone. Frank especially noticed how Peter had changed in the
|
||
classroom. He no longer joked with the other boys in the lessons. He stayed
|
||
very quiet and just got on with his work. Even in history and music, when
|
||
they sat together Peter said very little.
|
||
|
||
Occasionally they would look at each other and smile but Peter would just
|
||
look back to his books and carry on working. The two boys decided that they
|
||
would really have to do something about it, and as soon as possible.
|
||
|
||
It was Geoff who thought of a plan. He sought out Frank one afternoon
|
||
during break and told him what he had thought of. Frank agreed it was a
|
||
good idea, but thought it might be wise if they did not tell Peter. They
|
||
would surprise him, and what a good surprise it would be.
|
||
CHAPTER SIX
|
||
|
||
It was a Friday lunch time. Frank and Geoff sat next to Peter in the
|
||
dining room. They asked Peter what he was doing the following day. Peter
|
||
told them both that he was going to stay at school, as there was nothing
|
||
else to do. Geoff said that his father had sent him three tickets to the
|
||
fair that was opening the next day just outside of Southborough. He asked
|
||
if Peter and Frank would like to go too. They could get the ten o'clock bus
|
||
out to the fairground and a good time at the fair, and then catch the half
|
||
past three bus back to school, in time for tea.
|
||
|
||
Frank said that would be a grand idea, and then waited for Peter to say
|
||
something. Peter said it would be nice, but he didn't seem too enthusiastic
|
||
about the idea. Geoff and Frank looked at each other and grinned. They had
|
||
a feeling that Peter would enjoy himself, when he found out what they had
|
||
planned. They decided to meet at the school gate at nine thirty the next
|
||
day, to give themselves enough time to walk to the bus stop in the village.
|
||
Frank and Geoff told Peter that they were both playing cricket for the
|
||
school team that afternoon, and they finished their lunches and both left.
|
||
As they moved away from the table they told Peter not to be late in the
|
||
morning. He told them he would be there.
|
||
|
||
The two boys walked out of the dining room and walked over to the school
|
||
gate. It was true that they were playing cricket that afternoon, but that
|
||
was not why they had left in such a hurry. They still had an hour to go
|
||
before they had to be at the nets. They walked down to the village and
|
||
stopped outside the school outfitters. They both took something out of
|
||
their blazer pockets, and with a quick glance at each other, they pushed
|
||
open the door and went in.
|
||
|
||
Peter was also playing cricket that afternoon, but his was an inter-house
|
||
match. In a way he was glad that he was not playing for the school. By now
|
||
he had got used to the ribbing from his own school chums, but he knew he
|
||
couldn't face the humiliation of playing for the school with all the boys
|
||
from the other school around. As he walked back to his dorm to get changed
|
||
he could just imagine what they would say.
|
||
|
||
Peter entered his dorm and walked over to his bed. He opened his locker
|
||
and hung up his blazer. As he removed his shoes and socks he thought again
|
||
about the trip the next day. He didn't really want to go with his friends
|
||
to the fair because he would have to go in his uniform, and he felt it
|
||
would be obvious to everyone who saw him what had happened, him in short
|
||
trousers and the others in longs. It didn't even make any difference that
|
||
he would be wearing Prep school colors, as no senior school boys ever went
|
||
anywhere with preppies. He shrugged his shoulders. There was no way out of
|
||
it now, he thought to himself as he undid his tie, and removed his shirt
|
||
and vest. As he folded them and put them away, he knew he would just have
|
||
to make the best of it. He took off his shorts and underpants and put them
|
||
in his locker, and turned so that he could see his bottom in the mirror on
|
||
the door. It was now a bluish green color, most of the bruising having
|
||
faded. It still felt a little tender if he prodded it, but apart from that,
|
||
it was not too bad. He sat on the bed and reached for his long white socks.
|
||
They were not proper cricketing socks, but as none had been bought for him,
|
||
he had to make do with his running socks. He pulled them on and carefully
|
||
turned the tops over.
|
||
|
||
As he stood to get his shirt off of the shelf he noticed the marks on the
|
||
backs of his legs had still not faded either. He wished they would hurry up
|
||
and go away, preferably before to morrow. He slipped on the white
|
||
short-sleeved shirt and buttoned it up. Then he took out a pair of the
|
||
short cricket trousers. He felt a little silly as he pulled them on. White
|
||
had always made him look younger than he really was, and with these being
|
||
short as well, he really did look about eight or nine years old. He
|
||
buttoned up the fly and clipped up the waistband. These shorts had a built
|
||
in snake belt that he fastened, and then sat down. He took out his cricket
|
||
shoes, and having done up the laces, stood up and closed his locker. "Oh
|
||
well, here goes" he thought to himself as he left the dorm.
|
||
CHAPTER SEVEN
|
||
|
||
That night Peter did not sleep very well. He kept on thinking about the
|
||
fair. Perhaps he could sneak away from the others. That way he could just
|
||
be alone and it would not look so bad. He woke up the next morning with the
|
||
idea firmly fixed in his mind. He would find some excuse to get away from
|
||
Frank and Geoff and be on his own. He thought to himself, he might even
|
||
enjoy the fair after all.
|
||
|
||
After breakfast the three boys met at the gate. Peter saw that they had
|
||
their sports bags with them. He thought that they probably had some food
|
||
and drink in the bags. He realized that he had not remembered to bring any
|
||
himself. Well, he would just have to buy something at the fair. The three
|
||
of them set off on the short walk to the bus stop. When they got there,
|
||
they still had ten minutes to wait. Geoff said that he had to go to the
|
||
toilet, and Frank said that he did too. Peter said that he would look after
|
||
their bags while they went to the public toilets by the bus stop, but they
|
||
said not to worry, and picking up the bags, walked over to the toilets.
|
||
|
||
Five minutes passed and the boys had not returned. By now three or four
|
||
people had come to the bus stop and were waiting for the bus to
|
||
Southborough. Peter looked up and saw that the bus was coming. He ran to
|
||
the toilets and called to the boys. They told him they would be right there
|
||
and to get on the bus. Peter ran back to the bus stop just as the bus
|
||
pulled up. He got on and paid his fare, and tried to wait for his friends
|
||
on the platform. However he was getting in the way of the other people and
|
||
was told to sit down. He ran up the stairs to the top deck and sat down on
|
||
the back seat, so that he could see the boys when they came out, but by the
|
||
time he looked out of the window he saw Frank's head as he got on the bus.
|
||
Peter breathed a sigh of relief, at least they hadn't missed the bus. Which
|
||
was a good thing really, as Geoff still had all the tickets.
|
||
|
||
Peter sat looking out of the window. A woman came up the stairs and sat at
|
||
the front of the bus. Peter hardly noticed her. Nor did he notice two boys
|
||
in Belmont Court Prep school uniform come upstairs until they sat down next
|
||
to him. Peter didn't look round at them, hoping that they did not notice
|
||
that he didn't go to their school, and start asking embarrassing questions.
|
||
By now the bus had started moving. Peter realized that he had not seen his
|
||
friends come up the stairs. He thought that they must be sitting
|
||
downstairs. As he was sat in the corner of the bench seat he knew he would
|
||
have to ask the other boys to let him through. He turned to the boys to ask
|
||
them to let him out, and got the shock of his life! There, sat next to him
|
||
in full Belmont Court uniform, shorts, blazer, cap, the lot were Frank and
|
||
Geoff. Peter could not believe his eyes. He sat, just staring at them for a
|
||
couple of minutes, his mouth wide open. Never had he imagined that his
|
||
friends would do such a thing.
|
||
|
||
Frank and Geoff sat on the seat grinning. They both felt a little self
|
||
conscious, not having worn shorts in public for over five years. True they
|
||
had worn their shorts every day since Peter had given them to them, but
|
||
that was always underneath their long trousers. They were at last realizing
|
||
something of what Peter must have felt at school. Little did they realize
|
||
that they were to soon feel more of what Peter had endured!
|
||
|
||
By the time the boys got to the fairground Peter was feeling more like his
|
||
old self again. He was really looking forward to the afternoon after all.
|
||
He thought to himself how good his friends looked in their little uniforms
|
||
and he hoped that they would have an opportunity to really enjoy themselves
|
||
before the afternoon was over.
|
||
|
||
At the gate, Geoff gave the other two boys their tickets and they handed
|
||
them to the man at the turnstiles. He gave them a strange look as they
|
||
entered the fairground, but none of the friends noticed. They were too
|
||
interested in all the fun they were going to have. Had they stopped to ask
|
||
the man what the matter was they might have saved themselves a whole lot of
|
||
trouble!
|
||
|
||
First of all, the boys just walked around the fair. They had plenty of
|
||
time to spend and decided to first have a look at what there was to do.
|
||
They planned a route around the fairground so that they would be able to
|
||
have a go on all the rides and sideshows, and not miss anything.
|
||
|
||
They made their way over to the Big Wheel. They waited in the queue for
|
||
the ride to finish, and handed over their tickets to the man at the box. He
|
||
told them that they could all go in one chair as they were only little. He
|
||
probably didn't realize the effect those words had on the three boys. They
|
||
knew that they had passed the test. It seemed that everyone thought they
|
||
were just three nine-year olds out on an outing. If it noticed at all that
|
||
the boys were just a little tall for their age, no one took the slightest
|
||
bit of notice.
|
||
|
||
The man closed the bar over the chair and the wheel turned. The boys sat
|
||
still for a little while, while the rest of the people got on. When
|
||
everyone was on, the wheel moved again. This time it just kept going round
|
||
and round. Peter felt just a little scared at first. He had never been on a
|
||
Big Wheel before and he held on tight to the bar. He looked over at Frank
|
||
and Geoff. They were just a little nervous as well, but by the time the
|
||
wheel had gone around three or four times, all three of them were enjoying
|
||
themselves immensely.
|
||
|
||
It was not long before the wheel started to slow down. The three boys
|
||
waited for the man to lift the bar, and then ran down the steps and over to
|
||
the Helter Skelter. Geoff went in first, followed by Frank, with Peter
|
||
following behind. As they were climbing the spiral staircase to the top of
|
||
the tower Peter looked up, and noticed for the first time that he could see
|
||
right up the legs of his two friends' shorts. You can almost imagine his
|
||
surprise to find that neither of them were wearing underpants!
|
||
|
||
Peter had not put his on that morning because it had promised to be a very
|
||
hot day. He had found that, with the extra thickness of the lining, hot
|
||
weather could make him feel very uncomfortable. Peter became very exited at
|
||
the thoughts that were racing through his mind, and he knew that he must
|
||
find some way for the three of them to be alone. He must be able to, he
|
||
thought, sometime during the afternoon.
|
||
|
||
By now, all three boys were at the top of the tower. It looked a very long
|
||
way down. Once again, all three boys felt just a little nervous. Geoff laid
|
||
his mat on the top of the ramp and sat down on it. He felt the rough
|
||
matting prickling against his uncovered thighs. He was glad that it didn't
|
||
take too long to get to the bottom. He was also glad that his shorts were
|
||
lined. At least they offered a little protection to his bottom. For a
|
||
moment he wished he had not let Frank talk him into leaving his Y-Fronts
|
||
off when the two of them had got changed in the toilets. But he reminded
|
||
himself that it was all just part of the plan that he and Frank had
|
||
arranged. He set off down the ramp.
|
||
|
||
When the other two boys reached the bottom, they decided to go and get an
|
||
ice cream and something to drink. They walked over to the refreshment
|
||
stall. As they waited in the queue, Peter felt a hand tap him on the
|
||
shoulder. Wondering who it might be, he turned and looked up into the face
|
||
of the man standing behind him.
|
||
|
||
It was Mr. Beech, from Belmont Court School. He had brought his two sons
|
||
to the fair and noticed what looked like three boys from his school. He
|
||
knew that none of the boys were allowed out alone and had decided to go and
|
||
see what they were up to. When he saw that it was Peter, he was just a
|
||
little surprised. He knew that the pupils at St. Matthews were allowed out
|
||
of school at weekends, but he never thought that Peter would want to go out
|
||
dressed as he was, and especially with two of his own pupils. He thought
|
||
that the older boy would have felt too humiliated. As he turned the other
|
||
two boys around, he realized that they were not from his school. He
|
||
demanded to know what was going on. Frank and Geoff, not realizing who the
|
||
man was, said that they were waiting to buy some food. Peter said nothing,
|
||
just staring down at his feet. Mr. Beech demanded to know why the two boys
|
||
were wearing Belmont Court School uniform.
|
||
|
||
This time it was Frank and Geoff's turn to look sheepish. The teacher led
|
||
them away to where he had left his sons. He told his sons, two boys of
|
||
about seven, Peter thought, to go and get themselves an ice cream, while he
|
||
talked to the boys.
|
||
|
||
When his sons had gone, the teacher's manner changed again. He demanded to
|
||
know who Frank and Geoff were, and what they thought they were doing
|
||
wearing Belmont Court uniforms. Frank timidly tried to explain what had
|
||
happened to Peter, and how he and Geoff had decided to wear the uniforms to
|
||
try and cheer Peter up, as he had been so unhappy.
|
||
|
||
Mr. Beech told the boys that the reason that Peter was made to wear such
|
||
clothes in the first place was as a punishment for his bad behavior, and
|
||
that it was to teach him a lesson, not to have other boys decide that they
|
||
could just take things into their own hands to try and make things all
|
||
right. Both Frank and Geoff wondered how this man knew so much about Peter,
|
||
and were both surprised, and a little frightened, when the teacher told
|
||
them who he was. They had never thought that they might get into this
|
||
situation when they first thought of their plan. Now it appeared that the
|
||
whole thing had gone disastrously wrong, and that they had got into trouble
|
||
too.
|
||
|
||
Mr. Beech asked them where they had got the uniforms from. The boys told
|
||
him that they had both bought them from the school outfitters near the
|
||
school, with their own money. He said that as they had worn the clothes,
|
||
that they would not get their money back, and that it should serve as a
|
||
lesson to them.
|
||
|
||
As the teacher finished speaking, his sons returned, each one carrying a
|
||
choc-ice. He told the three older boys to go and get their food and to come
|
||
back to him when they had purchased it. The boys promised that they would,
|
||
and walked slowly over to the stall.
|
||
|
||
While they were waiting to be served Frank and Geoff asked Peter if that
|
||
was the teacher he had gone on the trip with. He told them that it was, and
|
||
that he was sorry he had got them into trouble. The two boys both told him
|
||
that it was not his fault, that they had got themselves into it. All three
|
||
boys wondered why Mr. Beech had told them to return to him. All sorts of
|
||
thoughts ran through their minds as they stood in line waiting to be
|
||
served. None of them were very comforting.
|
||
|
||
While the boys were getting their food, Mr. Beech had been wondering what
|
||
he should do about them. It was obvious that the two boys had only got
|
||
their friend's best interests at heart, but they had to be made to
|
||
understand that they could not just go ahead and do their own thing. They
|
||
had to be made to understand that there were reasons for everything. He
|
||
wondered if he should tell their Headmaster of their escapades, and let him
|
||
deal with them accordingly. He decided that that was not a very good idea,
|
||
but he knew that he could not just let the matter go unnoticed. As he saw
|
||
the three boys returning, an idea struck him, and he decided that he would
|
||
leave the decision to them.
|
||
|
||
Peter, Frank and Geoff walked back to Mr. Beech. By now they had decided
|
||
that the only thing that the teacher could possibly do was to tell their
|
||
Headmaster. Each one of them was afraid of the consequences and just wished
|
||
that there was some way that they could get out of their predicament. When
|
||
they got back to the teacher, he told them that they could stay at the
|
||
fair, but that they would have to stay with him and his sons. This was
|
||
because that, while they were dressed like his pupils, they would have to
|
||
behave themselves, and set a good example for the school. He would not have
|
||
three naughty children doing anything that might harm Belmont Cts'
|
||
reputation. The three boys were crestfallen. There was no way now that they
|
||
could see that they would enjoy themselves.
|
||
|
||
The boys, however, were very much mistaken. Mr. Beech turned out to be a
|
||
very entertaining person. He was very friendly towards the three friends,
|
||
helping them on and off of the various rides, and treating them almost as
|
||
if they were his own sons. His children were also very friendly. They
|
||
introduced themselves to Peter and his chums. Their names were Christopher
|
||
and Philip, and they told Peter that they too were going to Belmont Court,
|
||
at the start of the next term. At the moment they were at school in
|
||
Winchester, where their father had taught before coming to teach in
|
||
Trenton. It became obvious that their father had not told them anything
|
||
about the boys when they asked what it was like at Belmont Court. Luckily
|
||
for the friends, the teacher just told his sons to wait and find out for
|
||
themselves. Peter felt relieved that he had not had to invent a story for
|
||
the two boys. After all the boys had one last turn on the Roundabout, Mr.
|
||
Beech said that it was time for them all to leave. Peter looked at his
|
||
watch. It was four thirty! They would never get back to school in time for
|
||
tea. The teacher said that as the boys had probably missed tea at school,
|
||
they could come for tea at his house. He said that it would give him some
|
||
time to talk to them. The boys wondered what he meant by that, but they
|
||
would find out soon enough. Mr. Beech led the boys out of the fairground
|
||
and over to his car.
|
||
|
||
CHAPTER EIGHT
|
||
|
||
When they had finished tea, Mr. Beech took them into his study. It was a
|
||
large room, with a desk in one corner, and a large open fire. One the
|
||
ornate mantelpiece there were some cups and trophies. The boys noticed that
|
||
they were for archery, and obviously won by Mr. Beech. There were also two
|
||
large bookshelves filled with books on the other side of the room, and a
|
||
sofa along one wall, facing a pair of large french windows that looked out
|
||
over the gardens. The boys noticed how big the garden was. It seemed to go
|
||
on for ever, with large lawns and trees at the bottom. From where they
|
||
stood they could just see a small lake at the end of the lawn, surrounded
|
||
by reeds and rushes. All around the garden there was a high hedge. It
|
||
looked just perfect for games of hide and seek, or for building secret
|
||
hideouts. The boy thought that Christopher and Philip must have a great
|
||
time playing there during their holidays. They were out in the garden now,
|
||
climbing one of the trees that grew at the side of the lake.
|
||
|
||
Mr. Beech told them to sit down, as he sat on the edge of his desk. He
|
||
told them he had considered what he should do about them, and had decided
|
||
to give them a choice. He said that he could either take them back to
|
||
school and tell their headmaster what had happened or he could deal with
|
||
them there and then, and there the matter would rest. He would not say
|
||
anything to Dr. Edwardes. He told the boys that they could have five
|
||
minutes to make up their minds, and left the room.
|
||
|
||
Frank and Geoff both asked Peter what he thought. He said that it was up
|
||
to them, but if he was in their position,he would probably decide to let
|
||
Mr. Beech deal with him. At least then it would be over and done with.
|
||
There was no knowing what sort of trouble they would get into if the Head
|
||
found out what they had been up to.
|
||
|
||
The two boys thought over what Peter had said. It was true that they were
|
||
both very scared of what might happen to them if their headmaster found
|
||
out, but they were also afraid of what the Belmont Court teacher would do
|
||
as well. They had just made up their minds when the door opened and Mr.
|
||
Beech reappeared. He asked them what it was to be.
|
||
|
||
"We would rather you dealt with us" Frank said nervously.
|
||
|
||
"Call me sir". The boys looked at each other and then at the man. "Yes sir
|
||
" replied Frank, "Sir" was all that Geoff said.
|
||
|
||
"If you think that by picking me to deal with you, it's going to be easy,
|
||
you might as well know now.........YOU ARE WRONG". Frank first looked at
|
||
his friends and then at Mr. Beech. "We don't think that SIR, but what are
|
||
you going to do with us." he asked the man, nervously.
|
||
|
||
"YOU ARE GOING TO BE SPANKED"
|
||
|
||
Frank and Geoff looked at each other, and a smile appeared on both their
|
||
faces. The thought of a spanking seemed very mild to them as they would
|
||
surely have received the cane had they decided to let Mr. Beech tell their
|
||
Headmaster, so this would be nothing. Mr. Beech said, "YOU MAY NOT BE
|
||
SMILING WHEN I HAVE FINISHED WITH YOU", as he pulled a large wooden chair
|
||
into the middle of the room, in front of the french windows, and sat down.
|
||
|
||
He indicated to Frank to stand up. Frank rose to his feet and timidly
|
||
moved over to the man. He was beginning to think that this might not have
|
||
been such a good idea after all. He crossed the room and stood in front of
|
||
the man. "You know why you are going to be punished?" asked the teacher, as
|
||
Frank stood in front of him, his arms hung down at his sides, his
|
||
fingertips playing nervously with the seams of his short trousers. "I think
|
||
so,sir" the boy answered. "Well" asked Mr.Beech, "Why?". "Because I'm
|
||
wearing a prep school uniform sir, and I shouldn't be." Frank mumbled.
|
||
|
||
The teacher disagreed. "That is not the reason. You are to be punished for
|
||
thinking that you had the right to take it upon yourself to deliberately
|
||
undermine the authority of the person who had put your friend into short
|
||
trousers as a punishment, and to possibly bring disrepute on not only your
|
||
own school, but also onto the school whose uniform you are wearing. That is
|
||
the reason."
|
||
|
||
He looked over to Frank, who was staring at his hands in his lap. "And
|
||
that goes for you too. I don't know who thought up the idea, either of you,
|
||
but whoever it was should be very ashamed of their actions." He now turned
|
||
his attention back to Frank. "Well, do you now understand why you are to be
|
||
punished?". "Yes sir" replied the boy, his chin quivering slightly. "Right,
|
||
then we will begin" Mr. Beech said, as he took hold of the boy's left arm.
|
||
Years of experience had taught him about boys and their clothing. It was
|
||
obvious to his expert eye that there would be no need to actually undo the
|
||
boy's trousers. The lad was of such a build that just pulling on the legs
|
||
of his short trousers would bring them down to his ankles, with the added
|
||
advantage that, with luck, the waistband of the shorts would also pull down
|
||
the boys underpants as well. It came as a surprise then, to find that as he
|
||
pulled the shorts, the boy was not wearing pants at all. The teacher felt
|
||
slightly disappointed, because he knew that it was a far more humiliating
|
||
experience for a boy to feel his modesty being peeled away, layer by layer.
|
||
He placed Frank across his knees and studied the boys bottom. There was
|
||
something about a young teenagers bottom that attracted the man. It was
|
||
somehow firmer and more finely shaped than that of a younger boy. He
|
||
thought of his own two sons. Their bottoms were somehow chubbier and
|
||
rounder, he thought, as he remembered the evening before, when he had to
|
||
chastise them both for arguing about who was to sit in a certain chair
|
||
after dinner. He turned his mind back to the job at hand and began, lightly
|
||
at first, to smack the young boys bottom. Frank lay pinned to the man's
|
||
lap, an arm held across his shoulders. The waiting was terrible, he kept
|
||
hoping that the teacher would start and get it over with. When he finally
|
||
began, Frank thought to himself that maybe this was not going to be so bad
|
||
after all. He had received harder spankings than this from the Prefects at
|
||
school. Gradually though, the smacks got harder and harder. Where he had
|
||
been able to just lay still before, now he found himself squirming and
|
||
kicking at every stroke. He had been trying to count how many strokes he
|
||
was receiving, but when he got to thirty he gave up, the tears he had been
|
||
trying so hard to hold back, flooding out down his cheeks, the pain in his
|
||
buttocks driving everything else out of his mind. Finally he felt two
|
||
stinging slaps across the backs of his legs and felt himself being lifted
|
||
up by two powerful hands.
|
||
|
||
He was told to stand in front of the desk, with his hands on his head. He
|
||
felt very childish as he shuffled over to the desk, with his trousers
|
||
around his ankles.
|
||
|
||
Next it was Geoff's turn. By now he was feeling very scared indeed. He
|
||
could see how red Franks bottom was and could imagine just how painful it
|
||
was. He walked over to the chair. He hoped that he would be able to take
|
||
such a tanning. When they had been told that they were to be spanked, Geoff
|
||
had never imagined that they would be smacked for so long, or so hard. He
|
||
prayed silently to himself that he wouldn't cry, secretly knowing that he
|
||
doubted if he could stop himself, with such a strong man doing the
|
||
spanking. He felt the teacher undoing his shorts. As the fly was unzipped
|
||
he felt them drop to the floor.
|
||
|
||
Mr. Beech bent the boy over his lap. He had to lift the boy higher onto
|
||
his knees to get him into position. He could tell by the way that the
|
||
youngster was quivering that the young boy was obviously very frightened.
|
||
Well he was not going to get any less of a thrashing than the other boy. He
|
||
set to the boy and very soon the lad's buttocks were glowing a bright
|
||
crimson. He could tell by the way that Geoff was shaking that the boy was
|
||
trying as hard as he could not to cry. When would little boys understand
|
||
that it only made things worse. He knew that, with any form of punishment,
|
||
be it cane, strap, tawse or just spanking, that the final admission of
|
||
submission was for a boy to cry. Then, and only then, could a master
|
||
consider ending the punishment. Not at once of course, the culprit had to
|
||
be taught that disobedience would only bring retribution down upon them,
|
||
but once a boy had given into his tears it was up to him whether he learned
|
||
anything from the experience.
|
||
|
||
Geoff could bear no more. He had tried as hard as he could to hold back
|
||
his tears, but the pain finally drove them out. He sobbed uncontrollably.
|
||
He tried to pull away from the man but felt himself held down more firmly,
|
||
and spanked all the harder for his resistance. When he felt the two blows
|
||
across the backs of his thighs indicating the punishment was over, he could
|
||
barely lift himself out of the man's lap, he was shaking so much. He too
|
||
was told to stand in front of the desk, and shuffled obediently over to
|
||
stand next to his friend, and put his hands on his head.
|
||
|
||
Whilst Mr. Beech had been spanking Geoff he had glanced over at Peter. He
|
||
was rather surprised to find the boy was actually smiling. He was obviously
|
||
enjoying the sight of his school chums having their bottoms smacked. Up
|
||
until then, The teacher thought to himself, he had no reason to spank
|
||
Peter. But now it was a different matter. If he thought it was funny
|
||
watching his friends discomfort, he would soon find out that it was not so
|
||
funny. He thought of the paddle he had in the drawer of his desk. He had
|
||
only bought it about a week before and as yet had not had the opportunity
|
||
to try it out. Well young master Jenkins had just handed him the
|
||
opportunity. He finished the task at hand and told the boy to go and stand
|
||
in front of the desk. When the boy had done so, he stood up and strode over
|
||
to the desk himself, admiring his handiwork on the way. He decided that he
|
||
had made a very good job of it, even if he did say so himself.
|
||
|
||
He walked round the back of the desk and took out the paddle. He could see
|
||
the look of alarm on the faces of the two boys in front of him. They
|
||
obviously thought that there was more to come. For a short moment he
|
||
considered the possibility. No, he decided, they had taken their punishment
|
||
well, and deserved no more. Peter on the other hand was a different matter.
|
||
|
||
He walked back over to the chair and turned it around to face the desk. He
|
||
then told the two boys to turn around. When they had done so, the teacher
|
||
sat down and spoke to them. "You both took your punishment very well boys,
|
||
so I do not intend to punish you further" he cast his gaze over to Peter,
|
||
"However you may be surprised to hear that your young friend here found it
|
||
quite amusing to see your spankings, didn't you boy". Peter looked
|
||
startled. "No, I d.didn't" stammered Peter looking first at his friends and
|
||
then at Mr. Beech. "Then why were you smiling, eh?" demanded the teacher.
|
||
"I wasn't" implored Peter, feeling very guilty because he really had got
|
||
quite exited watching the man beat his friends' bottoms, in fact he had an
|
||
erection from it, he was so exited.
|
||
|
||
"I saw you" said the teacher, "and if you think I will stand for it then
|
||
you have another thing coming. Come here!". Peter knew from the tone of the
|
||
man's voice that he was in for a sound paddling. He stood up and walked
|
||
over to the man.
|
||
|
||
"TAKE YOUR TROUSERS DOWN!"
|
||
|
||
Any schoolboy to whom these words are directed recognizes the implication,
|
||
and will almost certainly obey without further command, although there may
|
||
be some token resistance or protest or even pleas for mercy according to
|
||
the nature of the victim, and Peter was no different. They carry with them
|
||
a power that outweighs the natural desire to avoid retribution. He realizes
|
||
that he must bare his bottom and that there will not be any protection from
|
||
shirt tails or underpants to soften the blows, however lightly or heavily
|
||
they may be administered.
|
||
|
||
The teacher also knew that it was far more humiliating for a boy to have
|
||
to remove his own trousers in front of other boys. When a teacher removed
|
||
them it was just another part of the punishment that they could not avoid,
|
||
but to have to lower your own shorts and underpants, and bare your bottom
|
||
to anyone else watching was an experience no boy relished.
|
||
|
||
As Peter undid his shorts and dropped them to his ankles it became obvious
|
||
to everyone else in the room the effect that watching his friends'
|
||
spankings had had on him. The teacher stood up and pulled the boy over to
|
||
him. He told the boy to kneel on the chair and pull his blazer and shirt
|
||
up. He slowly positioned himself as the teacher had directed, his buttocks
|
||
dutifully displayed in all their adolescent splendor. Mr. Beech told him he
|
||
was to receive twelve on each cheek, hesitated for a second, and moved
|
||
forward raising the paddle high in the air. As it swung downwards and
|
||
slapped against the boy's bottom Peter stifled a yell, but his bottom
|
||
gyrated from side to side. "Stay still" commanded the teacher. Peter had no
|
||
option but to do as he was told.
|
||
|
||
With each succeeding swat Peter's bottom flamed anew and he had to use all
|
||
his will power just to stay in position. He was ashamed of his earlier
|
||
actions, but he was determined to show the man that he could take his
|
||
punishment. Mr. Beech on the other hand, was equally determined to master
|
||
the boy. The plea for mercy as he administered the final lick of the
|
||
leather to Peter's well thrashed bottom told the man that he had succeeded.
|
||
|
||
He was a little disappointed that he could not whack the boys legs as a
|
||
signature, but he had said that the matter would go no further, and the
|
||
marks that it would leave would be sure to arouse somebodies curiosity. He
|
||
had slapped the other boys' legs as he knew that they would at least have
|
||
their long trousers to cover the marks.
|
||
|
||
Peter lay sobbing on the chair. He was not able to understand that his
|
||
punishment was over until Mr. Beech lifted him gently to his feet. He
|
||
winced as the man drew up his shorts for him and fastened them around his
|
||
waist. "Now you know what the paddle feels like" he said "So you'll be a
|
||
good boy and apologize to your friends for gaining pleasure out of their
|
||
pain. Peter rubbed his bottom and said he was sorry. Then Mr. Beech left
|
||
the room, leaving the boys to finish getting dressed.
|
||
|
||
The boys heard a tap on the window. They turned around and saw Christopher
|
||
and Philip trying to open the doors. Peter walked over and undid the catch
|
||
and let the boys in. "I say" said Philip, walking into the room first,
|
||
"Daddy didn't half lay it on, didn't he". The boys had forgotten about the
|
||
two boys in the garden! Christopher told them that they had sneaked around
|
||
inside the hedge and had watched the whole thing. Then Philip asked Frank
|
||
and Geoff what they were doing. They had to explain that they didn't really
|
||
go to Belmont Court, and neither did Peter. The two younger boys wanted to
|
||
know why their father had spanked them then, if they didn't go to his
|
||
school. Peter, feeling very embarrassed, tried to explain how it had all
|
||
started, and how his friends had tried to cheer him up, and got into
|
||
trouble themselves. Geoff also said that they had asked their father to
|
||
deal with them, rather than have him tell their Headmaster. The youngsters
|
||
decided that it seemed all perfectly normal, the way that young boys do,
|
||
and they disappeared off into the garden again. Peter shut the doors again
|
||
and walked over two his friends, who by now had got changed back into their
|
||
St. Matthews uniforms. He said that he was sorry he had got them into
|
||
trouble. They both told him that it was not his fault, but said that he had
|
||
been silly letting Mr. Beech catch him smiling while they had been smacked.
|
||
They also told him that in a funny sort of way, they had enjoyed having
|
||
their bottoms smacked like little boys, it somehow seemed to make buying
|
||
the uniforms worth it. They decided that all in all, it was fun to be
|
||
treated like eight year olds, and after all, they had got away with only
|
||
paying half price on the rides at the fair!
|
||
|
||
Mr. Beech came into the room, followed by Christopher and Philip. He told
|
||
the boys that they had better get back to school as it was getting on for
|
||
six o'clock. The three boys thanked the teacher for the tea, and said
|
||
goodbye. As the boys slowly made their way back to school they decided that
|
||
all in all, it had been a very good day out.
|
||
|
||
CHAPTER NINE
|
||
|
||
On the following Monday, Peter was told to report to the Headmaster's
|
||
study. He knocked on the door and was told to go in. The headmaster told
|
||
him to wait in his office as he had to go and get something.
|
||
|
||
When Dr. Edwardes had left the room, Peter wondered what it was that the
|
||
head had gone to get. He could hardly hope that it would be his uniform. He
|
||
had been very good recently but he had got the impression from the
|
||
Headmaster that he would have to be good for a long while, before he would
|
||
be allowed his own clothes back. He had just decided that what the
|
||
Headmaster had gone for was to do with something else when Dr. Edwardes
|
||
returned, Followed by Geoff and Frank, once again in Belmont Court uniform.
|
||
Apparently the Head had been at the fair as well, and when he saw the boys
|
||
leaving with Mr. Beech, had gone round later that evening to talk to the
|
||
man. He had tried not to tell him what had happened, but had eventually
|
||
explained the situation to the Head. He also told Dr. Edwardes that the
|
||
boys had been punished, rather more severely than they had really been, and
|
||
that they had learned their lesson.
|
||
|
||
Dr. Edwardes had taken the two boys to the school outfitters that morning,
|
||
but unfortunately had not been able to get them their money back. He was
|
||
still not very amused by what the boys had done, and as a result had
|
||
decided rather than see good money go to waste, he was going to make the
|
||
two of them wear their new purchases until the end of summer term. He had
|
||
however decided that as the boys had been foolhardy enough to spend their
|
||
money on part of the uniform, he would cut their allowances to pay for the
|
||
rest of the clothing to match. This would mean that they would have very
|
||
little spending money for the next few months. This he said would teach
|
||
them a very good lesson, both in economics, and common sense. He also told
|
||
Peter that he would have to wear his uniform until the end of the summer
|
||
term as well. He said that there was at least one got thing to come out of
|
||
the whole affair, and that was that at least they would find it difficult
|
||
to get into any mischief, as they would be watched, not only by their own
|
||
teachers, but by those from Belmont Court as well. He then told the boys to
|
||
go back to their lessons.
|
||
|
||
When they had left the Headmaster's study, the three boys walked over to
|
||
the classroom. The head had said that they were being made to wear the
|
||
clothes they were now wearing. They all considered this for a moment and
|
||
they all agreed that they didn't mind in the least. No longer would Frank
|
||
and Geoff have to hide their shorts in the back of their lockers. They
|
||
could wear them quite openly, and have lots of fun. Frank pointed out
|
||
another good point. At least he would not be getting told off all the time
|
||
by Matron for tearing the knees of his trousers. There were no knees to
|
||
tear in short trousers, only his!
|
||
|
||
Peter considered the events of the past couple of weeks. He remembered
|
||
first of all the humiliation of being put back into short trousers. His
|
||
friends were now going to have to cope with the same problems as he had. He
|
||
hoped that they would get through the initial ribbing. He also remembered
|
||
the trip he had taken to the nature reserve, and his first encounter with
|
||
Mr. Beech. Little had he realized at the time that he was to come into
|
||
contact, literally, again, within such a short space of time. He rubbed the
|
||
seat of his shorts, remembering the occasion, only to be reminded of his
|
||
most recent meeting with the man. There was no doubt about it, the prep
|
||
school teacher knew how to lay it on.
|
||
|
||
By now the boys had arrived at their classroom. As they entered, a ripple
|
||
of muted laughter ran around the boys already seated. The tutor gave the
|
||
three boys no more than a cursory glance and told them to take their
|
||
places.
|
||
|
||
When the bell rang for lunchtime the three boys walked across the
|
||
quadrangle to the dining room. They could hear the jeers and taunts from
|
||
all the other boys, but they didn't really mind. After all, in a way they
|
||
had managed to get exactly what they wanted, albeit only for a short while.
|
||
All three boys suddenly stopped dead in their tracks, smiling. They were to
|
||
wear their Belmont school uniforms until the end of the summer term.
|
||
|
||
And it was only the middle of the spring term!
|
||
CHAPTER TEN
|
||
|
||
It was the day before Easter half term holidays. As usual, there were
|
||
preparations being made. Most of the boys were going home for the holidays,
|
||
and they were busy packing to go home. One of the biggest problems for the
|
||
staff at a school like St. Matthews was trying to keep the boys under
|
||
control at times like this.
|
||
|
||
Boys, being boys, were naturally excited at the thought of going home, and
|
||
were apt to get very boisterous. One boy though, was not looking forward to
|
||
the holiday. Frank Smith had just received a letter from his parents
|
||
telling him that he would not be able to go home for Easter as both his
|
||
mother and father would be in Europe on business. Normally this would not
|
||
have caused any problems as he could have stayed with his Grandfather but
|
||
the letter had gone on to say that his grandfather had not been too well
|
||
recently, and he would not be well enough to look after him. His father had
|
||
decided that it would be better for Frank to stay at school, just this
|
||
once. And Frank had so looked forward to going home.
|
||
|
||
Peter and Geoff had talked about their friend's problem. They thought it
|
||
most unfair that Frank would have to stay at school, while most of the
|
||
other boys went home. Peter decided he would ask his father if Frank could
|
||
stay with them for the two weeks of the holiday. Geoff said that it would
|
||
be an excellent idea, if Peter's father agreed.
|
||
|
||
Later that afternoon, after school had finished for the day, Peter and
|
||
Geoff walked into the village to use the Public telephone. They both went
|
||
into the telephone box, and Peter dialled his father's telephone number.
|
||
The phone rang four times, and a woman's voice answered the phone. It was
|
||
his father's secretary. Peter told the secretary who he was and asked if he
|
||
could speak to his father. For a moment the line went dead and then Peter
|
||
heard a familiar voice on the other end of the line.
|
||
|
||
Peter explained the situation to his father. He told him how upset his
|
||
friend was, and what a good idea it would be if Frank could come and stay
|
||
with them for the hols. His father reminded him that, as he worked at the
|
||
surgery during the day, there would no-one at home to keep an eye on them
|
||
especially since his mother had returned to work at the hospital, since his
|
||
younger brother David had returned to school after his recent illness.
|
||
Peter had forgotten that his brother had not long been allowed back to his
|
||
day school after a bad case of measles, which had kept him in bed for over
|
||
a month.
|
||
|
||
Peter's father said however, that he would telephone the headmaster and
|
||
try to arrange something. He then asked Peter how he was getting on at
|
||
school. Peter wondered if he had been told about the uniform business. He
|
||
hoped not. That was something he wanted to keep to himself, at least for
|
||
the moment. He was still not sure how his father would react if he found
|
||
out.
|
||
|
||
Peter told his father that things were alright, and he had lots to tell
|
||
him when he got home. Peter's father reminded him that he would probably
|
||
not get home until late Friday evening, and told him not to cause his
|
||
mother too much trouble if she were to get home first. Peter promised him
|
||
that he wouldn't, and also reminded him to try and sort something out about
|
||
Frank. He said goodbye and replaced the receiver.
|
||
|
||
As the boys walked back to school Geoff asked Peter what his father had
|
||
said. Peter explained that his father was going to telephone the
|
||
headmaster, to try to arrange for Frank to stay with him for the holidays.
|
||
Both boys hoped that he did.
|
||
|
||
The next day, after lunch, Frank came running up to Peter in the
|
||
quadrangle, a wide smile on his face. He told Peter that he had been called
|
||
to the Headmasters' office and told that he was to stay with Peters' family
|
||
for the half term break. He hugged Peter and asked him how he had done it.
|
||
Peter told him that it had been his father who had telephoned the Head, and
|
||
obviously the Head had agreed to the idea.
|
||
|
||
Over the last days of term, the boys planned out what they were going to
|
||
do during the holiday. They all decided they didn't want to stay indoors,
|
||
but rather wanted to go camping or something else outdoors, so that they
|
||
could wear their short trousers. Geoff said that his family had a tent that
|
||
would be big enough for the three of them to sleep in, as well as keep all
|
||
their bags dry and under cover. Peter said that Frank could use his old
|
||
bicycle, and that they could ride around the countryside and camp in a
|
||
field or wood at night. All three thought that was a good idea, and spent
|
||
the rest of the time working out what they would need for food and drink
|
||
for the trip.
|
||
|
||
The day of the holiday arrived. The boys got dressed and packed their
|
||
cases. The buses that were to take the boys to the station would be
|
||
arriving at mid-day, but all the boys had to put their cases in the main
|
||
hall, ready to be loaded when the coaches arrived. All three boys were very
|
||
excited at the thought of their trip, and could hardly wait to go. Peter
|
||
wondered what his father would think when he met the boys at the station,
|
||
three boys in shorts. He decided he was not going to worry about it and
|
||
just made up his mind not to think any more of it. When the coaches
|
||
arrived, all the cases were loaded into the back, and the boys climbed
|
||
aboard. The three friends sat on the back seats and waited for the bus to
|
||
move off. They could hardly contain their excitement!
|
||
|
||
CHAPTER ELEVEN
|
||
|
||
When the coaches arrived at the station, the form masters told the boys to
|
||
behave themselves on their homeward journeys, and reminding them that they
|
||
were easily identified by their uniforms and that if they heard of anyone
|
||
behaving in an unruly manner, that they would be severely dealt with on
|
||
their return to school.
|
||
|
||
Peter and his friends made their way to the platform to wait for their
|
||
train. Most of the other boys lived in the west of the county, and so
|
||
waited on the other side of the station. There were only eight boys going
|
||
in their direction, most of them fifth form boys. It looked as if the three
|
||
friends would be traveling alone, not that they minded though, they had
|
||
become quite used to their own company over the last few weeks.
|
||
|
||
When the train arrived, the three boys climbed into one of the carriages.
|
||
It was one of those trains that did not have a corridor, just compartments
|
||
that seated eight people, four each side. They put their luggage up onto
|
||
the racks and sat down, waiting for the train to go. Frank and Geoff said
|
||
that they wanted to sit by the window, so Peter lowered the window in the
|
||
door and looked out at the now deserted platform.
|
||
|
||
Just as the train started moving off, Peter noticed someone running for
|
||
the train. It was Raymond Wilder, the prefect. He just managed to get into
|
||
the boys compartment as the train left the station. He sat down heavily
|
||
into the seat, puffed out. The boys were a little disappointed. They had
|
||
hoped that they would have the compartment all to themselves.
|
||
|
||
Peter felt a little self conscious with the prefect in the compartment, so
|
||
he leaned back out of the window with his feet wedged against the two seats
|
||
in case the train lurched, rested hid chin on his hands, and watched the
|
||
countryside flash by. With the wind blowing in his ears, he couldn't hear
|
||
his two friends talking to the prefect. He would have been quite surprised
|
||
by what the boys were saying, however he would soon have a surprise of
|
||
another sort.
|
||
|
||
He was so interested in watching the view he didn't notice Raymond kneel
|
||
down behind him. It was only when he felt the older boys' hand brush his
|
||
leg under his shorts that he looked around behind him. The prefect was
|
||
wriggling between his legs. When he saw Peter turn, the older boy told him
|
||
to keep looking out of the window, but to move back just a little. Peter
|
||
felt very excited, and just a little scared. He knew that no-one could see
|
||
into the compartment, but he wondered just what the Prefect was going to do
|
||
to him.
|
||
|
||
While the train continued its journey, Raymond had managed to get into the
|
||
position he wanted. He was sat on the floor between the younger boy's legs,
|
||
with his head between the boy's groin and the carriage door. He reached up
|
||
the front of Peter's shorts and with one hand holding the waistband, slowly
|
||
unzipped the fly with his other hand. He pulled the grey material apart and
|
||
felt for the opening in the boy's Y-fronts. Already Peter's willy was hard,
|
||
and Raymond had a little difficulty getting it out of Peter's underpants.
|
||
Finally he managed to get the boy's stiff little erection out into the
|
||
open.
|
||
|
||
Peter still had no idea what was going to happen. He could feel the older
|
||
boy's breath against his winkle, and it excited him. He looked round at his
|
||
friends. The other two boys were sat either side of him, and were feeling
|
||
up the legs of his shorts. He felt their hands working under the leg bands
|
||
of his pants, feeling their way around his now quivering bottom. He could
|
||
hardly believe it, his being fondled by his two friends, and another boy
|
||
sat between his legs.
|
||
|
||
Suddenly he felt something wet around his willy. He leant back from the
|
||
window and looked down to see the prefect taking his winkle into his mouth.
|
||
Peter shuddered with excitement, the sensation of the older boy's smooth
|
||
wet lips sliding up and down his boyish member, gently sucking all the way
|
||
down to the root. His friends were now holding the waistbands of their own
|
||
short trousers as the elder boy unzipped them and took out their willies,
|
||
rubbing them up and down against the fabric of their grey shorts. The two
|
||
boys moaned and squirmed with the feelings they were getting, and Geoff
|
||
reached down and undid the buckle of the bigger boys belt, undoing his
|
||
trousers and reaching into the boy's Y-fronts. He was quite amazed at the
|
||
size of the older boy's cock. It was about six inches long, and very hard
|
||
indeed. Geoff began rubbing Raymond's cock as fast as he could, whilst
|
||
Frank felt the boy's balls and chest.
|
||
|
||
Almost as if it had been planned, all four boys erupted at the same time,
|
||
Frank and Geoff over their shirts, Raymond over his blazer, and Peter,
|
||
writhing in the most powerful orgasm he had ever had, straight into the
|
||
smooth, warm mouth of the prefect, all four of them continuing until not a
|
||
drop more was left. Peter sat down on the seat. He was totally exhausted.
|
||
He looked at the other boys. They were all in the same state as he was.
|
||
No-one said a word.
|
||
|
||
When the boys finally regained their composure, they all re- fastened
|
||
their trousers, having moped up most of the mess with their handkerchiefs,
|
||
and sat down. There was nothing much any of them could say.
|
||
|
||
CHAPTER TWELVE
|
||
|
||
Raymond finally broke the silence. He asked the boys what they were going
|
||
to do over the holidays. When he heard what they had planned, he asked them
|
||
if they would like to stop over one night at his father's farm. There was
|
||
plenty of places they could pitch their tent, and they could have a meal
|
||
with his family in the evening. The three boys said thank-you, saying that
|
||
they would like that very much. The four boys continued talking while the
|
||
train carried on its slow journey through the countryside.
|
||
|
||
After about twenty minutes Raymond stood up and walked over to the window.
|
||
The younger boys noticed he was playing with himself through his trousers.
|
||
He seemed to be thinking about something. The prefect slowly turned around
|
||
and stared at Peter, sat by the window. The older boy quietly told Peter to
|
||
kneel on the floor in front of him.
|
||
|
||
Peter did as the prefect told him, wondering what he would be told to do.
|
||
He knelt down in front of the older boy and looked at him. He was feeling
|
||
just a little nervous and shy now, but somehow he knew that everything
|
||
would be alright. He looked at his two friends, sat either side of him.
|
||
From where he was kneeling he could see right up the inside of their
|
||
shorts. They both smiled at him.
|
||
|
||
Raymond stood up in front of Peter. He put his hands on Peters' head and
|
||
lifted the boy's face to look at him. He told the younger boy to unzip his
|
||
trousers and take out his cock. Peter slowly reached up and took hold of
|
||
the zip, slowly pulling the fastener down the front of the older boys
|
||
trousers until he had completely unzipped the fly. He could see the soft
|
||
white cotton cloth of the bigger boy's Y fronts and also the ribbing around
|
||
the edge of the opening that was concealing the other boy's much larger
|
||
winkle. Peter could see the bulge that it made through the prefect's
|
||
underpants, and smell the aroma of the older boy's manhood. He felt just a
|
||
little afraid as he started to pull apart the opening in the briefs,
|
||
wondering what he would be made to do. He felt inside the opening, and
|
||
finding what he was being told to release, slowly drew it out of it's white
|
||
confinement. He noticed that it was already stiff again.
|
||
|
||
Once Peter had drawn the prefect's cock out of his underpants the older
|
||
boy told Peter to sniff it. The small boy put his nose right up to the skin
|
||
and started to smell the aroma. It was a funny smell, that seemed to be
|
||
almost sweet to his nostrils. Peter was very excited at what was happening
|
||
to him, and he could feel a new stirring in his own Y-fronts.
|
||
|
||
After a short while, Raymond lifted Peter's face up again and started
|
||
speaking to the young lad again. He told Peter to open his mouth and stick
|
||
his tongue out. When the kneeling boy had done what he had been told, the
|
||
prefect slowly moved his hips around, so that the tip of his now firm cock
|
||
lightly brushed the younger boy's tongue. The older boy could tell that
|
||
Peter liked what was happening by the way his tongue moved, following the
|
||
movement of his member as it gently moved from side to side. He told the
|
||
other two boys to kneel on the floor as well, telling them to explore their
|
||
friend's shorts all over. Geoff ran his hand lightly over Peter's grey
|
||
shorts, noticing as he did so, his chum's now stiff little winkle pressed
|
||
hard against the material, while Frank touched the cloth covering his
|
||
friend's small firm buttocks.
|
||
|
||
All this attention was driving Peter wild. His friends' attentions were
|
||
nothing new to him, but combined with the excitement of the older boy's
|
||
ministrations, Peter could hardly contain himself.
|
||
|
||
Raymond gradually slowed the movement of his hips, bringing his cock to
|
||
rest on the younger boys tongue. He was ready to try the next step in his
|
||
seduction of the youngster. He slowly moved his hips backwards and forwards
|
||
so that the tip of his cock pressed against the young boy's lips. He was
|
||
not surprised to find that almost immediately the younger boy opened his
|
||
jaws wider to allow entry into his waiting mouth. As the prefect slid his
|
||
young manhood past the boys eager, waiting lips, he moaned softly, the
|
||
sensation of having his cock inside a younger boys' moist, willing mouth
|
||
sending shivers of ecstasy up and down his spine.
|
||
|
||
Peter felt Raymond's hands tighten on his head as the older boy slowly
|
||
slid more and more of his hot, rigid flesh into his mouth. He tried to
|
||
remember how it had felt when the other boy had done it to him, and slowly
|
||
he started to close his lips around the shaft and draw his cheeks in, in a
|
||
sucking action he had felt against his own earlier that afternoon. He could
|
||
still feel his friends hands feeling him through his short trousers. In
|
||
fact Frank had one hand down the front of his shorts and was squeezing his
|
||
willy through his underpants. He wished the train journey would never end.
|
||
|
||
All of a sudden he felt Raymond shudder. Immediately after he felt
|
||
something warm shoot into the back of his mouth. It had a salty taste to it
|
||
and he realized that the older boy had shot into his mouth. He tried to
|
||
swallow it down his throat, but with the older boy's willy already in his
|
||
mouth he found he could not manage to get it down. As he felt it dribbling
|
||
out of his lips he felt the now familiar tingling feeling in the pit of his
|
||
tummy, and a dampness spreading out against his skin. He could tell that
|
||
Frank had noticed the dampness as the other boy rubbed harder and harder
|
||
against his willy, sending wave after wave of violently pleasant feelings
|
||
surging through the young boy's body.
|
||
|
||
Eventually both Peter and Raymond sank to the floor exhausted. Raymond
|
||
pulled Peter to him and, forcing his tongue into the small boy's mouth,
|
||
kissed him roughly on the lips, at the same time fondling the small boy
|
||
through his shorts. Geoff looked out of the window and noticed that the
|
||
train was pulling into their station. Quickly the boys' tidied themselves
|
||
up and, by the time the train had stopped, were all sat on the seats,
|
||
looking for all the world as if nothing had happened at all.
|
||
|
||
As the boys left the station, Raymond gave Peter the address of his
|
||
parents' farm, telling them to drop in when they were nearby. He handed Per
|
||
the paper and, making sure no-one was looking, patted the front of the
|
||
young boy's shorts, telling the three of them to make sure they had a good
|
||
time as he walked off to the bus-stop.
|
||
|
||
Peter looked around. He hoped that no-one had seen the prefect touch him
|
||
there, as he was sure that he might be in trouble if anyone had. Geoff
|
||
noticed that there was a large white mark down the front of Peter's blazer.
|
||
He said it must have been when he had dribbled Raymond's' stuff down the
|
||
front of it.
|
||
|
||
They all walked over to the public toilets and went in. Frank and Geoff
|
||
helped Peter remove the stain from his blazer. When all the traces were
|
||
finally removed, the three boys left the building and walked down the road,
|
||
and turned into the lane that lead to Peter's house.
|
||
|
||
CHAPTER THIRTEEN
|
||
|
||
When the three boys arrived at Peter's house, Peter was surprised to find
|
||
everybody out. He took his three friends around to the back of the house
|
||
and they went into the kitchen. Peter called to see if anyone was in, but
|
||
there was no answer. He opened the refrigerator and took out three cans of
|
||
Coca-Cola, opening one for himself and passing the other two to his
|
||
friends.
|
||
|
||
Frank asked if Peter would show him where he would be sleeping. Peter told
|
||
him that he would be staying in his room, where his parents had put the
|
||
spare bed up for him. He led the way through the dining-room to the front
|
||
hall. All three boys went upstairs to Peter's bedroom. Peter was quite
|
||
surprised to find three beds in the room, until he remembered that his
|
||
father had written to him, telling how he had turned his younger brother's
|
||
room into a games room for the two of them, and moved David into his
|
||
bedroom. Peter wondered where his brother was. He should have been home
|
||
before them. Perhaps he had stopped off at one of his friends houses. In a
|
||
way, he was quite pleased that his brother wasn't there.
|
||
|
||
Two of the beds were side by side with a small bedside cabinet between the
|
||
two of them. Peter showed Frank which would be his bed for the holiday and
|
||
sat down on his own, dropping his case in the middle of the room. He
|
||
indicated with his finger the wardrobe and chest of drawers, telling Frank
|
||
that he could unpack his clothes and put them in there.
|
||
|
||
As Frank unclipped his case, Peter noticed that Geoff was also opening his
|
||
own case. He took a bag out of it and started to take of his Belmont Ct.
|
||
uniform, folding it away, and taking his St. Matthews out of the bag. He
|
||
explained to his friends that he was a little afraid of what his father
|
||
might do if he saw him in shorts. Peter remembered the time they had both
|
||
been caught by Geoff's father scrumping apples from a neighbors garden. He
|
||
had taken their shorts and pants down and spanked them in front of the
|
||
neighbor. Peter agreed with Geoff that it would be a good idea if he
|
||
changed, and he told his friend that he could leave his Belmont Ct. uniform
|
||
in his wardrobe, so that Geoff's parents wouldn't find it. Geoff thanked
|
||
Peter but reminded him to make sure that he brought it with him when they
|
||
went camping. Peter said that wouldn't forget it and playfully smacked his
|
||
friend's bottom as he pulled on his long school trousers.
|
||
|
||
When Geoff had finished dressing he told his friends that he would have to
|
||
go now, but hopefully would be able to come back later in the afternoon.
|
||
Peter and Frank walked down to the front door to wave goodbye to the boy.
|
||
|
||
Back upstairs again, Frank and Geoff talked about the train journey home.
|
||
Frank wanted to know what it was like, having another boy's winkle in your
|
||
mouth. Peter said that it was nice, but a bit difficult at first. Frank
|
||
looked down in the general area of his friend's willy, thoughtfully. Did
|
||
Peter think, he asked, he could try, just to see what it was like. For an
|
||
answer, Peter moved to the edge of the bed and opened his legs, indicating
|
||
to his friend that he didn't mind in the least.
|
||
|
||
Frank dropped to his knees. He slowly unzipped his friend's short trousers
|
||
and took out his willy. It was quite soft and limp, but Frank put his lips
|
||
around the end and gently licked the shaft. Peter told him to suck on it,
|
||
and slide his mouth up and down the whole length. As his friend slowly
|
||
became more sure of himself, Peter put a hand on each side of Frank's head
|
||
and gently ran his fingers through his hair. For the third time that day,
|
||
Peter found his winkle going stiff and hard. He thought how much nicer it
|
||
was having a mouth around his willy than just rubbing it in your hand.
|
||
|
||
Just then the boys heard the front door open. Frank quickly stood up while
|
||
Peter ran over to the wardrobe. He didn't want anyone to see him in his
|
||
little boy's school uniform just yet. He also suggested to Frank that he
|
||
should get changed as well.
|
||
|
||
They had almost finished changing when Peter's father knocked on the door
|
||
and came into the room. The boys just had time to close the wardrobe door.
|
||
They had changed into jeans and white shirts, and no-one would have guessed
|
||
that only moments before they had been dressed in anything else. Peter's
|
||
father asked them how the journey had been, and apologized for not picking
|
||
them up at the station. The boys glanced at each other with a look of
|
||
relief, not having even thought of that possibility! Imagine what might
|
||
have happened if Peter's father had seen them both in their short grey
|
||
trousers. There would have been a great deal of explaining to do!
|
||
|
||
Peter asked his father if it would be alright if he, Frank and Geoff went
|
||
camping during the break. His father said that it was a good idea, and
|
||
asked them when they were planning to go, and how long for. Frank said they
|
||
would like to leave Saturday morning, and if it was alright, to go for the
|
||
week. Peter's father said he would think about it,and tell them after
|
||
dinner. In the meantime, why didn't Peter show Frank around the village. He
|
||
was sure that they would find something to do until dinner-time. Peter and
|
||
Frank looked at each other, smiling. They certainly would, probably
|
||
something to do with an interrupted experience that both boys were more
|
||
than eager to conclude.
|
||
|
||
When Peter's father had left the room and gone back downstairs Peter
|
||
suggested that they should go by bicycle to Geoff's house. That way they
|
||
could cut through the woods at the back of the house. Frank agreed readily,
|
||
already grasping the idea that Peter had in mind. The two boys quickly
|
||
removed their jeans, put their grey short school trousers on, and put the
|
||
jeans back on again. Peter also took out Geoff's shorts as well, just in
|
||
case he was allowed out as well. They went down to the garage and took out
|
||
the bikes. Peter had to pump up one of Frank's tyre as it had gone a little
|
||
flat, but soon they were pedaling down the drive, and round the back of the
|
||
house.
|
||
|
||
Both boys felt very restricted by the extra clothing they were wearing. It
|
||
probably had something to do with the fact that they had neither of them
|
||
worn any sort of long trousers for some weeks, and their legs soon felt
|
||
quite hot and sweaty. By the time they reached Geoff's house, both boys
|
||
were feeling a little uncomfortable. They left the bikes against the side
|
||
of the house and walked around to the front door.
|
||
|
||
It was Geoff himself who opened the front door. He took them upstairs into
|
||
his bedroom, explaining that his brother, who was four years younger than
|
||
him, was downstairs in the front room with some friends from school. He
|
||
told them he had felt a little annoyed that his brother had brought his
|
||
friends home, because he didn't feel that he had anything in common with
|
||
the younger boys. Peter remarked that they all had more in common than
|
||
Geoff realized, when Graham, Geoff's young bother walked into the bedroom,
|
||
with Peters' brother, David. Both boys went to the same school, and the
|
||
older boys notices that the younger boys school uniform was almost
|
||
identical to the one that they had to wear, except of course for the badges
|
||
on the cap and blazer. Why even the tie was the same!
|
||
|
||
Graham asked his brother if he thought it would be alright if he went out
|
||
with his friends for a couple of hours. Geoff said he thought so, as long
|
||
as he was back by tea time. Graham said he would be back before then and
|
||
turned and left the room. Peter told his brother that their father was
|
||
already home, and not to be late home. David said he wouldn't, and followed
|
||
his friend down the stairs.
|
||
|
||
When the younger boys had gone, Peter asked Geoff if he would like to come
|
||
out on his bike with them, and pulled his friends grey shorts out of his
|
||
jacket. Geoff grinned at the two boys and told them to just try and stop
|
||
him. In no time at all, he had taken off his long grey trousers and
|
||
replaced them with short ones. He still had his long socks on as well. He
|
||
quickly took out a pair of jeans and pulled them over the top, and the
|
||
three boys went outside while Geoff got his bike out.
|
||
|
||
The three friends rode across the road and into the woods. On the way over
|
||
Peter had noticed a small clump of bushes that had already got quite a lot
|
||
of leaves on. He remembered how he and Geoff had once dug a hideout under
|
||
them and spent many happy hours there, safe in the knowledge that Graham
|
||
would not be able to find them and insist that they let him play with them
|
||
as well.
|
||
|
||
The three boys got off their bikes and wheeled them into the bushes. Peter
|
||
quickly pulled the branches across the entrance to the hide and lifted the
|
||
corrugated iron sheet that formed the door to the hideout itself. He was
|
||
pleased to see that it was still dry inside, and that there were candles
|
||
and matches on the rough table that he and Geoff had made out of old orange
|
||
boxes. He climbed down into the hole and called the other two down as he
|
||
carefully lit the candles. Geoff said that he was surprised that the
|
||
matches were still alright, because neither of them had been down here for
|
||
ages, and they should have been very damp. However, work they did, and soon
|
||
there was the distinctive smell of hat wax and burning wick floating around
|
||
in the air.
|
||
|
||
Geoff reached up and pulled the hatch down. With it closed it felt quite
|
||
warm and cosy, although maybe just a little cramped. The three boys sat
|
||
down on the pallets that they used as a floor and looked at each other. All
|
||
three of them seemed to want to say something, but didn't quite know what
|
||
to say.
|
||
|
||
It was Peter who finally broke the silence. He said that it was getting
|
||
quite warm and sticky, and that he at least was going to take his jeans off
|
||
and get more comfortable. This was not an exactly easy task, as there was
|
||
barely enough room for the three of them to lay down in, and the hole was
|
||
not quite deep enough for them to stand straight up in either. In the end
|
||
though, Peter managed to get his jeans most of the way down, with Frank and
|
||
Geoff pulling then off of his legs as he sat down and lifted his feet in
|
||
the air.
|
||
|
||
Eventually, all three boys were sat there in their short grey trousers.
|
||
Frank told Geoff what had happened after he had left Peters' house. Geoff
|
||
said he was sorry he had left so soon, but why not try it with all three of
|
||
them?
|
||
|
||
Peter and Frank looked a little puzzled, how could they all do it at the
|
||
same time? Geoff explained his idea. He quickly unzipped Peters shorts and
|
||
took his willy out, whilst at the same time taking his own out. He told
|
||
Peter to lay on the pallet on his side. Peter still looked a little
|
||
confused but went along with his friend. When he was in position, Geoff
|
||
told Frank to get his winkle out as well, and to lay at an angle to Peter,
|
||
and put Peters' willy in his mouth.
|
||
|
||
Frank gently stretched out on the pallets and started sucking Peter's now
|
||
hard little cock. Finally Geoff lay on the floor so that his willy was
|
||
rubbing against Peters' face, and carefully moved his body until he was
|
||
able to reach Frank's with his own lips. The three boys were really
|
||
enjoying themselves now, each having his own willy sucked as he sucked on a
|
||
'lollipop' of his own. Peter slipped a hand up the leg of Geoffs' shorts
|
||
and started to feel the boy's bottom through his underpants. They were all
|
||
so engrossed in what they were doing they didn't notice the corner of the
|
||
hatch lifting and a group of small faces staring down at them in
|
||
astonishment! It was David, Graham and their school friends. The three boys
|
||
in the hide out quickly tried to put their winkles away, but they couldn't
|
||
do anything about it in such a small space.
|
||
|
||
David asked them what they were doing wearing little boys' trousers, and
|
||
what the three of them had been doing with each others' winkles. Geoff just
|
||
looked at his brother, unable to say a word. One of the young boys said
|
||
that they must have been doing something naughty, and should have their
|
||
bottoms smacked. The three boys pleaded with the younger boys not to tell
|
||
on them.
|
||
|
||
Richard, the boy who had mentioned the smacking said they would not tell
|
||
on them, but only if they let the younger boys smack them instead. The
|
||
three friends were horrified! It had been bad enough having younger boys
|
||
seeing them being spanked by Mr. Beech, but to actually have their bottoms
|
||
smacked by younger boys, that would be too humiliating. Richard said that
|
||
they either let them do it or they would tell Graham and Geoffs' daddy, and
|
||
he would hit them a lot harder than they would.
|
||
|
||
In the end the three friends had no choice but to let the younger boys
|
||
have their way. Graham told them to come out of the hide, and to bend over
|
||
and touch their toes. When the three boys had done so, Graham, David, and
|
||
another boy called Colin moved around to the back of the three older boys.
|
||
|
||
It was Colin who suggested taking their short trousers and pants down and
|
||
smacking their bare bottoms. It was obvious to the older boys that the
|
||
youngsters were enjoying humiliating them. The small boys tugged on the
|
||
shorts and pulled them down to the boys' knees. They saw for the first time
|
||
older boys bare bottoms in the position for punishment. Richard suggested
|
||
that David and Graham should smack their brothers' bottoms, and that he
|
||
would do Frank's.
|
||
|
||
Graham was the first to start. He swung his arm back and started to smack
|
||
his big brother's bottom as hard as he could. Geoff didn't realize how
|
||
strong young boys could be. In a matter of moments all three of them were
|
||
begging the small boys to stop. However the younger boys had different
|
||
ideas. They picked up some thick twigs that were lying on the ground at the
|
||
base of one of the bushes and, using them like canes, began to thrash the
|
||
bigger boys' bottoms. In no time at all the three friends were crying and
|
||
pleading with the younger boys to stop.
|
||
|
||
In the end, when the younger boys had had enough, they stopped their
|
||
beating. Peter, Geoff and Frank all had little weals appearing where the
|
||
small boys had caned them. They had been none to accurate either, and there
|
||
were marks on the backs of the boys' legs, almost down to their knees.
|
||
Colin told them they could pull their pants and shorts up. The three
|
||
friends were relieved to hear that the younger boys were finished. Their
|
||
bottoms felt as if they were on fire! They could feel the ridges of the
|
||
weals as they pulled up their underpants. They knew they would have those
|
||
marks for a long time, even after they had returned to school after the
|
||
holidays. It was going to be very embarrassing trying to explain the marks
|
||
to the other boys in the showers after sports!
|
||
|
||
The younger boys decided that they would be going, and walked over to
|
||
their bicycles. As they rode off, the three friends were still rubbing
|
||
their bottoms. They were very sore! They also decided to go home, as none
|
||
of them felt very much like doing anything after the caning they had
|
||
received.
|
||
|
||
It wasn't until they went to get their jeans that they realized they had
|
||
been taken! The younger boys must have taken them with them when they had
|
||
left. The three older boys were absolutely horrified. They would have to go
|
||
home dressed only in their grey short trousers!
|
||
|
||
All three boys were now very scared. They knew they had no choice now but
|
||
to ride home in their school shorts. They also knew they that unless they
|
||
could manage to get home and up to their bedrooms and change into some long
|
||
trousers, they would have to face the chagrin of having to tell how they
|
||
came to be wearing them in the first place. They were very scared indeed!
|
||
|
||
CHAPTER FOURTEEN
|
||
|
||
The three boys walked over to their bikes. Peter peeked out of the bushes
|
||
to see if anyone was around. When he was sure that there was no-one around,
|
||
he called to his two chums that it was safe. The three of them slowly
|
||
walked out of the bushes, pushing their bicycles in front of them. After
|
||
one last look to see if anyone was around they jumped on their bikes and
|
||
rode home. As they drew near the edge of the woods, Geoff noticed two faces
|
||
looking out from a bush. It was David and Graham. They called to them,
|
||
beckoning them over to the bush. The three older boys rode their bikes
|
||
around the back of the bush to where David and Graham were stood, waiting
|
||
for them. The younger boys told the friends that they had waited for them,
|
||
and told them that they had their jeans, but that they had hidden them. The
|
||
three boys demanded that they told them where they were hidden, but all the
|
||
younger boys would say was that they had promised their friends they would
|
||
not give them to the boys until the three of them had been caught wearing
|
||
their little schoolboy shorts. David told the older boys he didn't think it
|
||
was fair that they should get into trouble. He said that he would give them
|
||
back, but only if they told him why they had been wearing school shorts.
|
||
The three friends looked at each other, and Peter turned to his brother and
|
||
his friend and told them all that had happened at school.
|
||
|
||
David and Graham listened as the older boy told them everything that had
|
||
happened during the last term. When Peter finished the story though, David
|
||
and Graham were still not convinced. They asked them where the rest of
|
||
their uniform was. Geoff told his brother that all three of their uniforms
|
||
were at Peter's house.
|
||
|
||
David and Graham insisted that they wanted to see all of them in their
|
||
full uniform. The three boys argued with them that it was impossible, as
|
||
Peter's father was at home, and they would not be able to get them, but the
|
||
younger boys said that if they didn't let them see them in their little
|
||
school-boys uniforms they would not give them back their longs!
|
||
|
||
In the end, David said that he would let Peter have his jeans back, so
|
||
that he could go and get the uniforms, and bring them back to the woods.
|
||
The other two boys tried to tell David and Graham that Peter would probably
|
||
not be able to bring the uniforms back, but Peter's little brother would
|
||
not listen. He told them to wait there while he went to get Peter's jeans.
|
||
He said that it would be a waste of time following him as he had hidden
|
||
each boys jeans in a different place. The boys had no choice but to sit and
|
||
wait for him to come back.
|
||
|
||
After about four minutes, the young lad came back with Peter's blue jeans.
|
||
He hurriedly pulled them on. Frank and Geoff told him to be as quick as he
|
||
could, as it was getting quite late, and they would all be expected back
|
||
quite soon. Frank also told Peter to be careful not to let his father see
|
||
him. Peter promised he would get back as fast as he could, and got on his
|
||
bicycle and rode off in the direction of his house.
|
||
|
||
When Peter got home, he found the house deserted. His father had left a
|
||
note on the kitchen table, saying that he had had a call from a patient,
|
||
and would be back about six o'clock. Peter looked at his watch. It was five
|
||
past five. He raced up to his room, and quickly took out the three uniforms
|
||
from the back of his wardrobe, took out his sports-bag, and hurriedly
|
||
pushed the clothes inside it. He then ran back down the stairs, through the
|
||
kitchen to his bike, and cycled as fast as he could to where the other boys
|
||
were waiting.
|
||
|
||
When he got off of his bike, David and Graham immediately asked him if he
|
||
had brought the uniforms. Peter said yes, he had got them in his
|
||
sports-bag. David and Graham then told the three boys to change, so that
|
||
they could see them. The three boys reluctantly did as they were told.
|
||
|
||
When the three of them were dressed in their uniforms, David and Graham
|
||
told them to stand in a line. The two boys stood in front of them for a
|
||
moment, and then walked all the way around them. David said to Graham that
|
||
they looked just like some of the nine year olds that went to their school.
|
||
He was just about to say something else when all five of them heard a sound
|
||
on the other side of the bushes. The three friends rushed into the bushes,
|
||
leaving David and Graham behind the other bush.
|
||
|
||
The younger boys quickly looked through the bush. Their plan had worked
|
||
perfectly. They saw the rest of their friends the other side making a lot
|
||
of noise. David quickly collected all of the clothes up and pushed them
|
||
into Peter's sports-bag and zipped it up. He then crept around the other
|
||
side of the bush to his friends, and told them what had happened. The
|
||
younger boys sniggered and giggled amongst themselves. They decided that
|
||
they would leave the boys there, and take their clothes. They crept away
|
||
from the bush, and when they were far enough away, called to the older
|
||
boys.
|
||
|
||
Peter, Frank and Geoff heard their names being called, and came out of the
|
||
bushes. They saw that their other clothes were gone, and David, Graham and
|
||
their friends running across the road. They realized that they had been
|
||
tricked! Now they were dressed in full uniform, and there was no chance at
|
||
all of getting their other clothes back. For the first time since Mr. Beech
|
||
had caught them at the fairground, they were really scared.
|
||
|
||
CHAPTER FIFTEEN
|
||
|
||
The boys stood for a while, wondering what they should do. Peter looked at
|
||
his watch. It was five past six. His father would be back home by now, and
|
||
there was no way that he and Frank would be able to get back into the house
|
||
without being seen. Even Geoff would not be able to get home without being
|
||
caught, because his mother had returned home while Peter had been getting
|
||
the uniforms. The three boys wished that they had never decided to go to
|
||
the hideout! In the end they decided that the only thing they could do was
|
||
to go home and try and explain why they were wearing what they were, and to
|
||
tell their parents why they had been put back into short trousers. They all
|
||
knew that it was not going to be a pleasant task. Geoff said goodbye to his
|
||
friends and got on his bike. With a final wave he rode across the road to
|
||
his house, and went indoors. Peter and Frank waited until they saw their
|
||
friend go indoors, and then they too got on their bicycles and slowly rode
|
||
home.
|
||
|
||
When Peter and Frank got home, they were surprised to find Peter's father
|
||
was waiting for them. He told the two boys to go up and get washed for
|
||
dinner. He made no comment on their clothes, but Peter had a feeling that
|
||
the two of them were in trouble. Both boys slowly made their way up to the
|
||
bathroom.
|
||
|
||
When they returned downstairs, Peter's father told them to go into the
|
||
dining room and eat their dinner. He also told them that he wanted to speak
|
||
to them in his study when they had finished. The two boys looked down at
|
||
the ground. They felt very ashamed, and also a little scared. Peter's
|
||
father told them to run along now and eat their food. Peter and Frank
|
||
walked slowly out of the room.
|
||
|
||
When the two boys entered the dining room, they found David already
|
||
sitting at the table. He looked a little scared, and told the two friends
|
||
that he was sorry he had got them into trouble. Peter just scowled at him
|
||
and said he would get him later. Frank said very little.
|
||
|
||
The two boys didn't feel very much like eating. They were both rather
|
||
afraid of what was going to happen to them after the meal. Peter looked
|
||
over to his friend and saw that his lip was quivering, and he seemed to be
|
||
on the verge of crying. Peter told his friend not to worry, trying to
|
||
reassure himself at the same time, but he did not sound very convincing.
|
||
|
||
When the meal had finished, Peter's father came into the dining room and
|
||
told all three boys to go and wait for him in his study. Peter looked over
|
||
at his brother, and wondered why he had been told to go to the study as
|
||
well. All three boys stood up and walked through to the study.
|
||
|
||
Mr. Jenkins came into the room. He stood in front of the boys and looked
|
||
long and hard at each of them. He then walked around his desk, and picked
|
||
up a piece of paper, looked at it, and then returned his gaze to the three
|
||
young boys.
|
||
|
||
He spoke first of all to Peter. He told him that he had been told by the
|
||
headmaster about the punishment he had received when arrangements had been
|
||
made for Frank to stay for the holiday. He told Peter that he was very
|
||
disappointed in his behavior, and that if it hadn't been for the
|
||
headmaster's assurance that Peter's behavior had vastly improved since he
|
||
had been put back into short trousers, he would have been in for further
|
||
punishment for not telling him.
|
||
|
||
However, he continued, that was not what they had been called to the study
|
||
for. He told them that they needn't think that they would get off scot
|
||
free. Peter's father told the two older boys that they were to wear shorts
|
||
throughout the holiday, and that he would be keeping a close watch on their
|
||
behavior, and that if they should misbehave, their headmaster had suggested
|
||
the method by which they should be chastise. Both boys had a very good idea
|
||
what that would be!
|
||
|
||
Mr. Jenkins now centered his attention on his younger son. He held the
|
||
piece of paper in his hand up in front of him. He asked David to explain
|
||
himself. Peter noticed that it was a mid-term report from David's school.
|
||
It said that even making allowances for David's illness, he was still not
|
||
working hard enough. The report said that he was lazy, inattentive and
|
||
cheeky. Mr. Jenkins said that he was not pleased at David's attitude at
|
||
school, and that it was obvious that something would need to be done. Peter
|
||
and Frank looked at each other. It was obvious to the two of them that the
|
||
younger boy was going to be punished, but Peter could not believe that his
|
||
younger brother was to be caned in front of the two of them.
|
||
|
||
Peter's father told David to take off his blazer. As the boy did so he
|
||
indicated to Peter and Frank to stand at the other side of the desk. He
|
||
then told David to drop his shorts and Y-fronts and to bend over the desk.
|
||
When the younger boy had done so, Peter and Frank were told to hold David
|
||
down.
|
||
|
||
Peter was quite amazed at his father. Never before had either boy been
|
||
punished in the presence of the other. Peter also wondered when his younger
|
||
brother had started to get the cane. Being only just ten years old, David,
|
||
as far as Peter could remember, had only been spanked. Peter himself had
|
||
not been caned until he was eleven years old. In a way, Peter felt it was
|
||
quite unfair of his father to cane his younger brother at such a young age.
|
||
|
||
Peter was quite surprised then, when his father produced a leather paddle
|
||
from the desk drawer. It was just like the one Mr. Beech had used on his
|
||
bottom, only a few weeks before. Peter now understood why his father had
|
||
asked them to hold David down. His brother would find this first paddling
|
||
the most painful punishment he had yet received.
|
||
|
||
Mr. Jenkins told his youngest son that it was because of his laziness and
|
||
bad attitude to school that he was being punished, and that he was lucky
|
||
that he was not being caned. Instead he was going to be given a good
|
||
paddling. Mr. Jenkins told all three boys that he had bought the paddle on
|
||
the advice of Peter's Headmaster, and that Peter and Frank could also
|
||
expect the same treatment if they misbehaved during the holiday. Both boys
|
||
looked at each other. Peter could remember very well the pain that could be
|
||
inflicted by the paddle, but Frank had not yet had the misfortune to be on
|
||
the receiving end of it.
|
||
|
||
Mr. Jenkins told David that he would receive twelve strokes as his
|
||
punishment. Peter winced. He had received far more than that from Mr.
|
||
Beech, but he knew that his young brother would find that quite painful
|
||
enough. Peter looked down at his brother's face. Already, tears of
|
||
apprehension were streaming down the boy's face, but he knew better that to
|
||
attempt to use his distress to arouse pity.
|
||
|
||
The father placed the face of the paddle against the boy's pale yet firm
|
||
buttocks for a moment, then drew back his arm. The paddle flicked down, and
|
||
David almost simultaneously cried out, trying to stand up at the same time.
|
||
struggling against Peter and Frank, who were both trying to hold him down.
|
||
Rapidly, without pause, the paddle came down twice more. Again the boy
|
||
tried to pull up with an even louder cry, but his father just waited for
|
||
his son to settle before continuing. By now the young lad's bottom was
|
||
starting to redden. The next two strokes were delivered. David tensed
|
||
violently, almost pulling away from the two older boys holding him down,
|
||
but as he started to raise up he received another stroke on the upper part
|
||
of his bottom which made him cry out again, but had the effect of making
|
||
him drop back down onto the desk. The last strokes came very rapidly, and
|
||
David let out a great shout, but stayed quite still, almost rigid. His
|
||
father told him to get himself together, and when the two older boys had
|
||
let him go he gingerly pulled up his underpants and short trousers, veiling
|
||
from sight the now bright red bottom.
|
||
|
||
His father said that he hoped his experience would help him to be a good
|
||
boy in future. David wanted to assure his father that he would try and
|
||
behave, but no words would come. Instead a flood of tears, held back until
|
||
then, burst the floodgates and coursed down his young, handsome cheeks.
|
||
Nobody moved.
|
||
|
||
Soon the young boy regained his composure, finished dressing and was told
|
||
to go to bed. Peter and Frank were told to wait.
|
||
|
||
When Peter's younger brother had gone upstairs, Mr. Jenkins spoke to the
|
||
two boys. He said that in view of the circumstances he would not be able to
|
||
allow the two of them to go camping the next day. He did say however, that
|
||
if they could convince him that they could behave well, he would consider
|
||
allowing them to go on the following Monday. Both boys were quite surprised
|
||
at the allowance Peter's father was making. Both boys promised that they
|
||
would be good.
|
||
|
||
Mr. Jenkins told both boys that they could start to prove themselves by
|
||
going to bed. Peter was just about to point out that his usual bedtime was
|
||
nine o'clock, when his father pointed out to him that, if he did not want
|
||
to be treated the same way as David in all respects, he would do as he was
|
||
told. Peter apologized to his father, and after both boys had said
|
||
goodnight, went straight upstairs to the bedroom.
|
||
|
||
CHAPTER SIXTEEN
|
||
|
||
The two boys found David laying face down on his bed,
|
||
crying. They both sat down on the bed beside him and tried to comfort the
|
||
boy. David looked up at his brother but didn't say a word. The tears were
|
||
still running down his face.
|
||
|
||
Frank whispered something in Peter's ear, stood up and walked over to the
|
||
bedside cabinet. He took out a tube of cream and took it back to Peter.
|
||
Peter took the tube from his friend and turned back to face his little
|
||
brother.
|
||
|
||
Peter was a little worried. He had never done anything with his brother
|
||
the way he had with Frank and Geoff. He could remember the time when he had
|
||
thought it very naughty to do the things he now enjoyed so much. He
|
||
wondered what his brother might think.
|
||
|
||
Very timidly, Peter slipped his hand underneath his brother, unclipped the
|
||
waistband of his shorts, and unzipped the little boy's fly. David looked at
|
||
his brother, but said nothing as the older boy gently pulled his short
|
||
trousers down. Peter gently pulled his brother's underpants down and looked
|
||
at the bright red bottom. It was quite amazing the effect a paddle could
|
||
have.
|
||
|
||
The two older boys gently smoothed the cream onto David's sore little
|
||
cheeks. They both noticed how hot it felt. They were rather glad that they
|
||
hadn't received the same punishment. David winced a couple of times as the
|
||
two boys touched sensitive areas, but just laid there while the two older
|
||
boys tried to relieve the pain of the paddling.
|
||
|
||
David thought back to the events of the afternoon. He had been quite
|
||
surprised when he had found his brother and his friends in the hideout. He
|
||
was even more surprised at what they had been doing. He also felt happy
|
||
though, as he realized he could now tell someone what had happened at
|
||
school earlier in the week. He wondered what his brother might say!
|
||
|
||
When the two boys had finished, they told David that it might be best if
|
||
he got undressed and went to bed. The younger boy agreed, and slowly got
|
||
off of the bed and went over to the wardrobe. Peter and Frank went to the
|
||
bathroom to wash their hands.
|
||
|
||
When the two boys returned to the bedroom they were quite surprised to see
|
||
David sat on his bed in his pajamas, rubbing his winkle. Peter was
|
||
especially surprised by the size of his brother's willy. It was almost as
|
||
big as his!
|
||
|
||
David told them he had been shown what to do by the Head boy at his
|
||
school. He told them that in each house at his school there were two dorms,
|
||
a senior and a junior. Leading from the junior dorm is a music practice and
|
||
teaching room. Earlier in the week he had been doing his trumpet practice
|
||
when Gareth the Head boy came in and interrupted him. He said that had been
|
||
listening to him practice every day for the last week as he could hear him
|
||
in the senior dorm. He had asked if David could show him how to do it, so
|
||
David made him buzz his lips and then put the trumpet mouthpiece to his
|
||
lips. He made a sound but it was not very strong at all, and David thought
|
||
that as the boy was bigger than him, he should be able to blow stronger, so
|
||
he told him he had to take deeper breaths and did what his teacher showed
|
||
him to do.
|
||
|
||
David told the two boys that he had put Gareth's hand on his tummy and
|
||
took a deep breath in and out. As the boy moved his hand away he brushed it
|
||
passed the front of David's shorts. This had made his willy twitch and he
|
||
told his brother that he just smiled.
|
||
|
||
David said that Gareth noticed this and then smiled back. He asked if he
|
||
could have a go and so David had put his hand on the older boy's tummy and
|
||
felt him take a deep breath. David said that he could see that he was
|
||
starting to bulge and he went a bit red. He then put his hand firmly on
|
||
David's tummy and said do it again.
|
||
|
||
As he breathed in he felt the Head boy's hand move down towards his bump
|
||
and saw Gareth feel his trousers. He told David to be quiet and unzipped
|
||
the younger boys shorts and pulled them down. David told the now excited
|
||
boys that the Head boy then rubbed the front of his pants. By then Peter's
|
||
brother told them that his willy was getting hard. Gareth then undid his
|
||
own trousers and said look at this as he pulled down his pants.
|
||
|
||
His willy was very fat and he had started to grow hairs around it. He then
|
||
asked if David had ever seen anyone wank? David said that he hadn't and
|
||
asked the boy what a wank was. David said that he was told to rub the older
|
||
boys winkle backwards and forwards whilst he played with David's.
|
||
|
||
David told his brother that then Gareth started to play with his bottom.
|
||
First of all the older boy kissed it, and then he touched the naughty bit.
|
||
He then took a pencil from the music stand and put some Vaseline on to it.
|
||
David explained to the other two boys that you keep Vaseline in your
|
||
trumpet case for the slides. Gareth then pushed the pencil right up David's
|
||
bottom. The younger boy told them that he was a bit scared and it hurt a
|
||
little bit, but after a while he got tingly feelings in his willy and all
|
||
over, so much that he could hardly stand up. Gareth then took out the
|
||
pencil and told David to keep rubbing his winkle, and to do it faster.
|
||
|
||
David told the two boys that he did as he asked. David said that he had
|
||
been very scared that they would get caught doing this, and that had made
|
||
him even more excited. He told his brother that his willy had felt all
|
||
funny as Gareth played with it. Then Gareth started to groan and his willy
|
||
started to twitch. David said he got a little scared and asked what was
|
||
happening. "I'm going to spunk", said Gareth "keep pumping my willy."
|
||
|
||
David said that he kept rubbing it and then whoosh, a huge jet of this
|
||
spunk stuff shot all over his jumper and everywhere. He told his brother
|
||
that he had been very scared when that happened, but Gareth had just said
|
||
that it was meant to happen. After that, Gareth had pulled up his shorts
|
||
and Y-fronts and left the room, leaving him to clear up all the mess and
|
||
get dressed again, before someone came in.
|
||
|
||
David asked his brother why the stuff had come out of Gareth's winkle but
|
||
not his. Peter explained that only big boys could spunk, but that David
|
||
would soon be able to do it as well. David then asked if he could see
|
||
Peter's and Frank's winkles. The two boys nodded and said he could if he
|
||
got them out for them. They sat down on David's bed and leant back against
|
||
the wall.
|
||
|
||
David crawled down the bed and knelt between the two boys. He unzipped
|
||
their flies and put a hand inside each boys Y-fronts. By now both boys were
|
||
quite hard again, and the younger boy had problems trying to get them out,
|
||
but in the end he had a stiff little willy in each hand. He asked the boys
|
||
if he could rub them for a little while. Both Peter and Frank said that he
|
||
could if he wanted to, but they ought to get ready for bed first, in case
|
||
their dad came in. David said ok, and let go of them, so that they could
|
||
get ready for bed.
|
||
|
||
Just as the two boys had finished putting on their pajamas, Mr. Jenkins
|
||
came into the room. He told the boys to get into bed, adding that he did
|
||
not want to hear a sound out of any of them. The three boys said good night
|
||
to him, and he left the room, turning out the light as he went. Peter
|
||
whispered to Frank and his brother that they would have to wait until
|
||
tomorrow to play. The three boys said good night to each other, and one by
|
||
one went to sleep, dreaming about what the next day would bring.
|
||
|
||
CHAPTER SEVENTEEN
|
||
|
||
The next morning all three boys woke very early. David was the first
|
||
awake, and he crept over to the two older boys beds. He knelt down between
|
||
the two beds and slowly slipped his hands under the quilts, and into the
|
||
openings of the two boys pajama bottoms. He was quite surprised to find the
|
||
two boys' winkles were stiff and hard. He began rubbing them, the way that
|
||
Gareth had rubbed his at school. He quite liked the feeling of having two
|
||
boys willies to rub.
|
||
|
||
Peter and Frank woke to find their winkles being played with. They both
|
||
lay very still for a while, enjoying the feeling of it. After a while Peter
|
||
slowly turned his head to look at his brother. Peter could tell by the look
|
||
on his face that he was enjoying it. Frank slowly pulled the quilt off of
|
||
him so that he could see exactly what the young boy was doing. Peter
|
||
removed his quilt too, and lay there, watching his younger brother pumping
|
||
away at both older boys willies.
|
||
|
||
Before either of the boys could do anything, they both spurted. It went up
|
||
in the air and landed on David's hands. The little boy kept rubbing as both
|
||
boys squirmed with the intensity of their orgasms. David had problems
|
||
keeping hold of both of them, but he continued until both his brother and
|
||
his friend flopped back against their pillows, totally spent.
|
||
|
||
David stood up and went and got some tissues from the drawer. He gave some
|
||
to the two boys and wiped his own hands with the rest. Peter patted the
|
||
bed, and told David to lay down. He told Frank to get the vaseline out of
|
||
the cabinet and sit on the bed. Peter slowly untied the younger boys pajama
|
||
tie and eased them down. He signaled to Frank for the cream, and told his
|
||
friend to take care of his brothers' winkle. Frank positioned himself, and
|
||
very slowly started to suck the young boys' willy.
|
||
|
||
Peter meanwhile opened the tube of cream. He put some on the end of his
|
||
finger and smeared it all over. He then sat down on the bed, and slowly
|
||
spread his young brothers legs. He could see the boys little hole. He
|
||
slowly started to probe it with his finger, being careful not to hurt him.
|
||
|
||
All of a sudden his finger slid into the hole. His brother moaned and
|
||
wriggled a little, but did not move. Peter pushed his finger in a little
|
||
more. It was very tight, and it felt like his finger was being sucked. He
|
||
started to move his finger around inside his brothers' bottom.
|
||
|
||
Every time Peter moved his finger, Frank felt the little boys' winkle
|
||
twitch in his mouth. He wondered what it felt like to have something up
|
||
inside his bottom. He decided he would like to try it. Perhaps, if Peter
|
||
agreed, he might even put his winkle in there! He was brought back to earth
|
||
by David shuddering. It was obviously the most powerful orgasm the little
|
||
boy had ever had, as his back arched, and his legs kicked around all over
|
||
the place. Frank noticed though, that the little boy had not shot anything
|
||
into his mouth. Oh well he thought, one day he would be able to spunk too!
|
||
|
||
Peter pulled his finger out of his brothers' bottom, and wiped it on a
|
||
tissue. Frank gave the boys' winkle a final lick and sat up too. David just
|
||
lay on the bed, totally exhausted.
|
||
|
||
The three boys chatted together for a while, and then Peter said they
|
||
might as well get up, so all three boys got out of their pajamas, and got
|
||
dressed, all three of them in the same clothes, Grey shorts, shirt, socks
|
||
and pullover. They looked for all the world like three small boys, which to
|
||
all intents and purposes they were. You would never had believed that any
|
||
of them were over nine years of age.
|
||
|
||
When they had all gone downstairs, Peter suddenly thought of Geoff. He
|
||
wondered what had happened to him when he had got home. Peter decided that
|
||
he would telephone his friend to see how he had got on. He looked at the
|
||
clock on the wall. It was eight forty-five. Both his mother and father had
|
||
gone to work, so he picked up the telephone and dialled Geoffs' number.
|
||
|
||
Geoff's brother Graham answered the phone. Peter asked if Geoff was in. He
|
||
heard the boy giggle, and call his brother to the phone.
|
||
|
||
When Geoff answered the phone, Peter asked him how it had gone last night.
|
||
His friend told him that nothing much had happened, but that his dad had
|
||
said that he would have to wear his shorts for the whole of the holiday,
|
||
and that he was being taken into town to get some more, and a suit with
|
||
short trousers for going out in. Peter said that he was surprised that his
|
||
father was going that far, but Geoff told him that his father had decided
|
||
that he was going to have to wear short trousers from now on, until he left
|
||
school! Peter was shocked, he hoped his father wasn't planning the same,
|
||
but Geoff told him that both their fathers had met last night, and decided
|
||
that, as they had worn shorts until they left school, why shouldn't their
|
||
sons? Geoff's father had also telephoned Frank's parents, long distance,
|
||
and got their approval as well. Peter thought to himself, no wonder Graham
|
||
had giggled when he answered the phone.
|
||
|
||
Geoff went on to say that it had been agreed that all three of the boys
|
||
were going to town that afternoon to be fitted out for the suits, and to
|
||
get the rest of the clothes they would need. Peter felt downcast. Imagine
|
||
having to wear shorts until they left school!
|
||
|
||
Peter said that he would call Geoff later, but his friend told him not to
|
||
bother, as they would see each other after Peter's father finished surgery,
|
||
as he was taking them all into town in his estate car. Peter said o.k, and
|
||
hung up.
|
||
|
||
Peter wondered if it was all true. He was sure that his father would have
|
||
told him if something like this was going to happen. Peter thought about
|
||
telling Frank, but decided he wouldn't mention it until he knew if it was
|
||
true or not. He turned and walked into the kitchen.
|
||
|
||
When he got there, he found the others had already started to eat their
|
||
breakfast. David was having cornflakes, and Frank was making himself some
|
||
toast. Frank asked Peter if he would like some while he was making his.
|
||
Peter thanked his friend, and said he wouldn't mind a couple of slices. As
|
||
Peter sat down at the table, David said that daddy had left a note for
|
||
Peter. He had seen it on the dresser. Peter's heart sank. He knew then that
|
||
what Geoff had told him was true.
|
||
|
||
He stood up and walked over to the dresser. He looked on the shelf and saw
|
||
an envelope with his name on it, written in his dad's handwriting. He
|
||
picked it up and slowly opened the envelope, pulling out the single sheet
|
||
of paper inside it. Peter looked at the paper. On it his father had written
|
||
a few lines, and Peter could have guessed what they were without looking at
|
||
it. It read:
|
||
|
||
Peter,
|
||
|
||
I will be closing the surgery early today as
|
||
|
||
there are certain things concerning you that have
|
||
|
||
to be discussed. I will be home about 11 o'clock,
|
||
|
||
and I expect both you and Frank to be at home when
|
||
|
||
I return.
|
||
|
||
After our talk we will be going into town, but I
|
||
|
||
will tell you about that when I get home.
|
||
|
||
Dad.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
When Peter read this he knew that everything that Geoff had told him was
|
||
true. He called to Frank and walked out of the kitchen. He wondered how he
|
||
was going to tell his friend what had happened.
|
||
|
||
When Frank came out into the hall, Peter closed the kitchen door to make
|
||
sure that his brother would not listen. He told his friend what Geoff had
|
||
told him, and waited for Frank's response. He was sure that Frank would
|
||
hate the idea.
|
||
|
||
You can imagine Peter's surprise when Frank said it was great. The boy
|
||
said that in the last few weeks he had got quite used to wearing them, and,
|
||
he whispered in Peter's ear, he got quite turned on every time he put his
|
||
shorts on. Also, he said, think of all the fun they would be able to have!
|
||
Peter tried to point out that they were to be made to wear shorts until
|
||
they left school, and that if they went on to take 'A' Levels, that would
|
||
mean they would be in shorts until they were eighteen!
|
||
|
||
Frank said that he doubted if it would go on that long. He said that they
|
||
would probably have to last the year out in shorts, but that the grown ups
|
||
would probably let them go back into longs eventually. He spoke in such a
|
||
way that after a while Peter agreed that it would be kind of fun, and at
|
||
least they would still be able to have as much fun as they had recently!
|
||
|
||
Peter thought it over. He decided that it might not be so bad after all.
|
||
However, he still could not quite forget the fact that he had first been
|
||
put back into short trousers as a form of punishment, and at the back of
|
||
his mind this latest news seemed to be an extension of that punishment. Oh
|
||
well, he thought to himself, Frank doesn't seem to mind so why should he?
|
||
|
||
When Peter's father returned home, he took the two older boys into his
|
||
study. He told them about the discussion he had with Geoff's father, and
|
||
the telephone conversation with Frank's parents. He told the boys that they
|
||
could see no reason why the boys should not wear shorts until they left
|
||
school, and he said that he had contacted their headmaster, and that he had
|
||
said it would be alright. He told the two lads that the Headmaster had
|
||
decided that the boys need no longer wear Prep school uniform, and that
|
||
they could wear their St. Matthews blazers and such with short trousers.
|
||
Mr. Jenkins went on to add that the Headmaster had said that he wished all
|
||
parents felt the same way, because not only did the boys behave themselves
|
||
a lot better since they had been put back into shorts, the savings that
|
||
could be made on the cost of the uniforms could amount to over a hundred
|
||
pounds per term!
|
||
|
||
Peter's Father then told them about the trip into town that afternoon.
|
||
Peter asked his dad about the suits that Geoff had told him about. His
|
||
father told him that it would be like an ordinary suit, except that instead
|
||
of long trousers, they would have short trousers made instead. He told the
|
||
boys that when he was a boy, he had quite a few suits like that, and also a
|
||
couple of casual jackets, that he wore with either his school trousers, or
|
||
smart tailored shorts. He walked over to the bookcase and took out a
|
||
photograph album. He showed the boys some photographs that had been taken
|
||
when he had been seventeen. Sure enough, there he was in his short suit, at
|
||
a wedding, and also a couple of photographs of him in casual jacket, on a
|
||
trip up to London. Peter noticed in the pictures that a lot of people were
|
||
staring at his father, and he mentioned that to his dad.
|
||
|
||
Mr. Jenkins told the boys that he had not had any long trousers until he
|
||
was eighteen, and those he had bought himself out of his allowance. He told
|
||
the boys that there had been three of them that had to go through the same
|
||
thing, one of them being Mr. Duncan, Geoff's father. Peter's father told
|
||
them that, as the other boys in their class started going into longs, at
|
||
about the age of fourteen, he had felt the same as them at first, but he
|
||
told them that you soon got used to it, and after a while you didn't even
|
||
notice it. He pointed out to them that, after all, hadn't they got used to
|
||
it at school?
|
||
|
||
Mr. Jenkins put the album back on the shelf. He told the boys that they
|
||
had better get washed up ready for lunch. The two boys raced upstairs to
|
||
wash their hands, and were back downstairs before Peter's father had even
|
||
had time to get the salad out of the larder.
|
||
|
||
David asked them why they were in such a hurry. Peter told his younger
|
||
brother that daddy was taking them to town. David asked if he was going
|
||
too. Peter looked over to his father, who said that yes, he could come, as
|
||
he might as well start now, too.
|
||
|
||
David asked his father what he meant, and his dad told him what had been
|
||
decided. David said that he wanted a suit and stuff as well, and so Mr.
|
||
Jenkins decided that they would all go to the tailors together.
|
||
|
||
CHAPTER EIGHTEEN
|
||
|
||
By the time one o'clock came, all three boys had had their lunch, and had
|
||
been upstairs and got ready to go out. When they came downstairs, Mr.
|
||
Jenkins was waiting for them. He looked them over and, after checking that
|
||
they had all washed properly, opened the front door and ushered the boys
|
||
out to the car. Peter asked his father if they were now going to pick up
|
||
Geoff. Mr. Jenkins told him that they were.
|
||
|
||
When they arrived at Geoff's house, Geoff, Graham and Mr. Duncan were
|
||
waiting for them. Both boys were dressed almost exactly the same as Peter,
|
||
David and Frank, in Grey shirt, shorts, socks and pullover. The only
|
||
difference was that the three boys in the car also had ties on.
|
||
|
||
The two boys squeezed into the back of the estate car. The two younger
|
||
boys asked if they could sit in the back of the car. Mr. Jenkins said they
|
||
could, but only if they promised to sit quietly, and not play around. David
|
||
promised that they wouldn't and the two youngsters climbed over the back
|
||
seat and sat on the carpeted floor of the estate part of the car.
|
||
|
||
When Mr. Duncan had closed the passenger's door and put his seat belt on,
|
||
Mr. Jenkins started the engine and they began their trip to town. As they
|
||
drove into town, The two men in the front started talking to each other, so
|
||
Geoff quietly asked the other two friends what had happened when they had
|
||
got home. Peter told Geoff that nothing had happened, and asked Geoff what
|
||
his father had said when he had got in.
|
||
|
||
Geoff told the two boys about what had happened. It was almost the same as
|
||
what had occurred in the Jenkins' house, except for the fact that Geoff had
|
||
been made to tell his father all about what had happened at school. Geoff
|
||
told the other two that he had felt very embarrassed, having to tell his
|
||
father about being put back into shorts, and all the ribbing they had
|
||
received from the other boys.
|
||
|
||
By now, they were just coming into town. Being Saturday, Mr. Jenkins found
|
||
it very difficult to find a parking space. Peter asked him why he didn't
|
||
use his Doctor's card and park on a yellow line. Mr. Jenkins told his son
|
||
that he only used that in an emergency, and if there were no other place to
|
||
park. He also told Peter that he could be fined if he was caught using it
|
||
when it was not necessary.
|
||
|
||
Mr. Jenkins managed to find a place in the public car park about half a
|
||
mile from the menswear shop they were going to. They all got out of the car
|
||
and waited for Peter's father to lock the car, and then they all walked out
|
||
of the car park and went out into the High Street. Peter and Geoff were
|
||
quite well know in the town, and very soon both boys became aware that many
|
||
people were staring at them. Geoff saw two boys that they had gone to
|
||
school with, stood on the other side of the street, and they were pointing
|
||
at them and laughing. Peter told his friend to just ignore them, and look
|
||
straight ahead. Geoff tried to take his friend's advice but he could still
|
||
hear the two boys laughing and cat calling to them as they walked down the
|
||
road.
|
||
|
||
Eventually they arrived at the shop. Mr. Duncan opened the door and
|
||
ushered the boys inside. Peter looked around the shop. It was quite small
|
||
inside, with lots of old wooden shelves, highly polished, and dark brown
|
||
with age. Also there were lots of drawers, the kind you see with glass
|
||
windows in the front, so that you can see exactly what is inside. Along one
|
||
wall there were lots of jackets and suits in all sizes, from little boys'
|
||
to large men's sizes. Also on racks were ties and scarves, and in one
|
||
corner a large table with all sorts of hats arranged on it. Peter walked
|
||
over to one of the counters, and looked through the glass front.
|
||
|
||
This too was full of ties and bow ties, scarves, collars and cufflinks.
|
||
The man behind the counter came around to the middle of the shop and asked
|
||
Peters' father if he could be of some assistance. When Mr. Jenkins had
|
||
finished telling the man what they were looking for, the shop assistant
|
||
told him that they might have just the sort of thing they were looking for.
|
||
The man explained that they had used to be outfitters for one of the
|
||
schools nearby, but that it had closed down a few years ago. He told them
|
||
that they still had a large selection of Sunday suits that the boys used to
|
||
wear. He asked them to excuse him for a moment, and walked out between two
|
||
large cupboards to the back of the shop. Peters' father turned to Mr.
|
||
Duncan and said that it sounded as if they were in luck.
|
||
|
||
When the man returned, he told Mr. Jenkins that they had about forty suits
|
||
left, in various sizes and colors. He explained that they didn't have much
|
||
call for them nowadays, but he was sure that they would have something to
|
||
suit. He led them all through the back of the shop to a large fitting room.
|
||
The boys saw a large rack of jackets in all sorts of colors, dark grey,
|
||
light grey, brown, blue, beige and green. There were even a few check
|
||
suits, similar to the one that Peter and Frank had seen in the photograph
|
||
of Peter's father.
|
||
|
||
Mr. Jenkins walked over to the rack with Geoff's father. They took one of
|
||
the suits from the rack and looked at it for a moment. Then they turned to
|
||
the shop assistant and said that they looked ideal. They asked if it would
|
||
be possible for the boys to try the suits on. The assistant suggested that
|
||
it might be easier if he took the boys' measurements first, that way they
|
||
would be able to see what would fit, and save time searching through the
|
||
racks. The two fathers agreed that would be the best idea, and the shop
|
||
assistant measured each boys waist and chest. When he had done this he took
|
||
some suits off of the rack and laid them down on the counter, each pile a
|
||
different size.
|
||
|
||
Mr. Jenkins asked the man how much the suits were. He was told that the
|
||
school had used to subsidize the uniform, and as such, depending on the
|
||
size of the suit, they would be between fourteen and nineteen pounds each.
|
||
Mr. Jenkins said that that was very cheap, and that if they could find some
|
||
that would suit the boys, that they could have three suits each. He told
|
||
the boys that they had better try on the suits, and that they could choose
|
||
which colors they wanted, but that they should all have one of the dark
|
||
grey suits each, the others they could select for themselves.
|
||
|
||
The shop assistant asked the two fathers if the would like a cup of
|
||
coffee. They both said yes, and so the man led them to the office, while
|
||
the boys started trying on the suits.
|
||
|
||
When the grown ups had gone, the boys started undressing. When they had
|
||
all stripped down to their underwear, each boy picked up one of the grey
|
||
suits, and taking them off of the hangar, tried them on for size. Peter
|
||
pulled on the shorts, and was surprised to find that they were lined, the
|
||
same as his school trousers. He went to zip up the fly, but was quite
|
||
surprised to find that, instead of a zip, there were buttons up the front.
|
||
Peter didn't know why, but he felt quite excited when he saw them. He would
|
||
soon find out how handy those buttons might be!
|
||
|
||
Next he put on the jacket. He did up the buttons and looked in the mirror.
|
||
His father had been right, the suit did look very smart. He bent down and
|
||
pulled up his socks. He turned round to face Frank and Geoff, who by now
|
||
were also dressed. He asked them what they thought. Geoff just said it
|
||
looked alright, but Frank said it looked smashing, and asked Peter what he
|
||
thought of his. Peter came over to his friend and had a closer look. Making
|
||
sure that no-one else saw, he quickly slipped a hand up the leg of his
|
||
friend's trousers. He was quite surprised to find how much room there was,
|
||
and he noticed that the leg of the shorts was a lot wider than their other
|
||
ones. Peter stood up and looked at the other two younger boys. They too had
|
||
their suits on now, and looking around at all of them, Peter thought to
|
||
himself how smart they all looked. He decided that he would try one of the
|
||
other suits on. He walked over to the counter and picked up one of the
|
||
check suits. Frank said to him, why didn't the three of them all have the
|
||
same suits. That way they could all wear the same all the time. Geoff asked
|
||
Frank what suits he fancied. Frank told him that he liked the check one and
|
||
the blue. Peter agreed, and Geoff also said that he liked them, so they
|
||
tried each one in turn. All three of them found the suits in their sizes,
|
||
and decided that they were the ones they wanted.
|
||
|
||
Whilst Peter was trying the check suit on, Frank noticed just how much
|
||
Peter looked like his father had done when he was a boy. Frank wondered if
|
||
he had ever done what they did. He wondered if Peter had had the same
|
||
thoughts.
|
||
|
||
When all the boys had selected their suits, Peter went and knocked on the
|
||
office door. The three men came out and had a look at the boys, who were by
|
||
now all wearing the grey suits again. The two fathers agreed that the boys
|
||
looked very smart. They then asked the shop-keeper, as he was, if he had
|
||
any other shorts in stock, as the boys needed more school trousers and also
|
||
some play clothes.
|
||
|
||
The shop-keeper told them he had football shorts in stock, but Mr. Jenkins
|
||
said he was looking more for proper shorts for the boys. The man went out
|
||
into the main shop and returned with a drawer. He showed a pair of white
|
||
shorts to the two men. They were very short in the leg, with turn ups. Mr.
|
||
Jenkins told Peter to try a pair on.
|
||
|
||
Peter looked around for a changing room, but his father told him not to be
|
||
silly, there were no women about, he could try them on here. Peter
|
||
bashfully undid his waistband, unbuttoned his shorts and dropped them to
|
||
his ankles. He took the shorts from his father and pulled them on. They
|
||
were quite tight, and the legs, which were very sort, barely covered his
|
||
crotch. His father told him to turn around. Mr. Jenkins felt the back of
|
||
his son's shorts, and turned to the shop-keeper, saying that they would do
|
||
fine. Each boy was to have three pairs of play-shorts, and also a couple of
|
||
short-sleeved shirts. Each boy was also to have two more pairs of school
|
||
short trousers. Mr. Jenkins told his son to take off his play shorts, and
|
||
to put the suit trousers back on. Whilst Peter was getting changed again,
|
||
the two fathers followed the shop-keeper back out into the shop and paid
|
||
for the clothes. They then called the boys, and gave each of then their
|
||
clothes to carry in a plastic bag. They thanked the shop-keeper for his
|
||
help and walked out of the shop.
|
||
|
||
As the boys walked back to the car, Peter noticed the two boys who had
|
||
been laughing at them earlier. When they saw all of them dressed the same,
|
||
their taunts were even more spiteful and vicious, but Peter thought about
|
||
what his father had said earlier that day, and, even though he felt like
|
||
going over to them and punching them on the nose, he looked straight ahead,
|
||
and kept walking in the other direction with the others. In a way, Peter
|
||
felt far superior to those two boys. He was also in a way quite proud of
|
||
himself, knowing that he was able to ignore the jeers of other, silly,
|
||
boys.
|
||
|
||
As the boys walked back to the car, they noticed how it felt as if they
|
||
had no shorts on at all. They realized that this was due to the legs being
|
||
much wider, allowing the air to circulate freely. Peter contemplated this
|
||
fact. He had already noticed the way the breeze blew up the legs of his
|
||
shorts. He wondered how much nicer it might feel if he was not wearing
|
||
underpants. He decided the first chance he got, he would take them off and
|
||
find out exactly how it felt!
|
||
CHAPTER NINETEEN
|
||
|
||
It was Monday morning. Peter, Frank and Geoff were sat around the kitchen
|
||
table in Peter's house. They had all got up early in expectation of their
|
||
trip. All three of them were dressed in their old school shorts, white
|
||
short sleeved shirts and grey socks. They were waiting anxiously for Mr.
|
||
Jenkins to decide whether or not to let them go on the camping trip up to
|
||
Raymond Wilder's parents farm. Geoff looked as if he could hardly wait, he
|
||
was fidgeting around so. They had had to tell Peter's father where they
|
||
would be going before he would even consider the idea. He was now
|
||
telephoning Ray's parents, to make sure that there would be no problems.
|
||
|
||
When Mr. Jenkins returned to the kitchen, he told them that it would be
|
||
alright for them to go. Mrs. Wilder had promised to keep an eye on them,
|
||
and so would her son. In fact it was an ideal time for them to go, said
|
||
Peter's father, because Mrs. Wilder had told him that there would be about
|
||
fifty Cub Scouts from the local area camping in the next field, and she
|
||
felt sure that if the boys were in need of any extra company, that the Cub
|
||
Leaders wouldn't mind them joining in.
|
||
|
||
The three boys were crestfallen. They had hoped to be allowed to go out on
|
||
their own, but now it looked as if they were going to be watched the whole
|
||
time. Even worse was the fact that they would be camping near to a load of
|
||
other boys, much younger than themselves. Pete
|
||
r felt sure that within a day
|
||
of being there, they would be expected to join in with all the little Cubs,
|
||
doing things like tying knots and building bivouacs. It seemed hardly worth
|
||
going now.
|
||
|
||
However, Mr. Jenkins said it was a good idea to get out in the fresh air,
|
||
and after all, they would have Raymond to play with. Mr. Jenkins didn't
|
||
realize that Ray was a prefect and older than the boys. He thought that he
|
||
was just another of their friends from school. If he had known the true
|
||
relationship between them, he would never have let the boys go in the first
|
||
place. However, he did not have any idea of the situation, and so had given
|
||
his permission for the boys to go.
|
||
|
||
The trio walked out to the garage. They had already packed their
|
||
rucksacks, and left them by the side of their bicycles, all ready for when
|
||
Mr. Jenkins said they could go. None of the boys had really considered the
|
||
possibility that Peter's father would not have let them go. They climbed
|
||
onto their bikes and rode off down the lane.
|
||
|
||
As they rode through the countryside, Peter and Frank asked Geoff how his
|
||
weekend had been. They had noticed that he had fidgeted as he had sat on
|
||
the hard kitchen chair, and both boys had a good idea why. Geoff told them
|
||
that he and his brother had been watching television when Gareth had
|
||
decided he wanted to watch the other channel, so the boy just got up and
|
||
turned over to the other side. Geoff told his friends that he had wanted to
|
||
watch the rest of the program, and so told Gareth to turn it back again.
|
||
When Gareth refused, he had got up to go and turn it back himself, but
|
||
Gareth started shouting at him, so he hit Gareth on the bottom. He hadn't
|
||
hit him very hard but Gareth went and told his dad. Mr. Duncan had come
|
||
into the room and demanded to know why Geoff had hit his younger brother.
|
||
|
||
When Geoff had told his father what had happened, his dad became very
|
||
angry, and told him that that was no excuse for hitting Gareth. He called
|
||
Gareth into the room and asked him what had happened. Gareth told his
|
||
father the same story, except he told his father that Geoff had hit him
|
||
hard. Geoff then went on to say that his father decided that he would not
|
||
tolerate fighting between the two boys, and had told them both to drop
|
||
their trousers.
|
||
|
||
Geoff felt very embarrassed telling the two boys what had happened next.
|
||
His father had taken off his slipper, and, starting with Graham, had
|
||
slippered the both of them. He told them that first of all he gave Graham
|
||
six on each cheek, and then told him to stand up. When it was his turn, his
|
||
father had put him over his knee, pulled his underpants down, and had given
|
||
him twelve stingers on each cheek, while Gareth was stood there watching.
|
||
|
||
Peter and Frank could tell that Geoff had not liked it from the way he was
|
||
talking. The boy went on to say that his father had told both of them to
|
||
stand against the wall and to stay there until he came back, and left the
|
||
room. While his father was out of the room, Geoff told his friends that he
|
||
had began to blubb. He told his friends that he had tried not to in front
|
||
of his little brother, but his father's slipper was very hard, and each
|
||
slap had landed right on top of the one before. He also said that his
|
||
brother had made him let him rub his willy, telling him that if he didn't,
|
||
he would tell his daddy what he had seen them doing in the hideout.
|
||
|
||
Geoff said he had felt embarrassed at having his brother touch him. He was
|
||
very surprised when Peter and Frank told him what David had done to them.
|
||
He couldn't believe that they would let a younger boy play with their
|
||
winkles. Peter told him it was great fun, and asked him why he hadn't
|
||
rubbed his brother up at the same time. Geoff told Peter that he had been
|
||
afraid that Graham might have told his dad, and then he would have been in
|
||
worse trouble.
|
||
|
||
Frank asked what had happened when his father had come back into the room.
|
||
Geoff told them that he and his brother had been sent up to bed, without
|
||
their tea. Geoff said it in such a way that he sounded like a five year
|
||
old. Peter and Frank smiled to each other. They both had an idea which
|
||
would soon bring their friend out of his shell!
|
||
CHAPTER TWENTY
|
||
|
||
It was mid-afternoon when they arrived at the Wilder farm. The got off of
|
||
their bikes and knocked on the door of the farmhouse. Raymond answered the
|
||
door. He was wearing a white T- shirt and his school white rugby shorts,
|
||
with button fly. Peter noticed the bulge in the front of the shorts. he
|
||
could hardly wait to get at it!
|
||
|
||
Raymond called inside to his mother that he was going to show the boys
|
||
where they could pitch their tent, and led the boys back down the lane and
|
||
along to the field where they were to camp. Raymond explained to the boys
|
||
that the cubs were camping in the field next to them, but that the hedge
|
||
was quite thick, and they should have very little trouble from them. Which
|
||
was just as well, he said, as he had something special planned. The boys
|
||
all wondered what that might be.
|
||
|
||
Ray led them down the lane and into a small field. He told them that they
|
||
had used to use it for the two ponies they had, but it was now unused, as
|
||
it was really too small to be used for much. The boys noticed that it was
|
||
surrounded by a thick, high hedge that made the field feel very warm, as it
|
||
kept out all of the breezes. Even the gate had a windbreak hedge behind it,
|
||
so that the field appeared totally enclosed. Peter thought to himself that
|
||
they could get up to all sorts of things and no-body would see them!
|
||
|
||
Ray led them to the far corner of the field, and told them to look at the
|
||
base of the hedge. The boys peered into the semi- darkness and could just
|
||
make out in the dim light what looked like a large, square bit of wood
|
||
laying on the floor. Ray told them that when he had been younger, a large
|
||
drainage pipe had been laid down, so that the ponies field would not get
|
||
waterlogged, but when the ponies went, it was sealed up. He told the boys
|
||
that he had spent a whole summer opening up the old duct again, and that he
|
||
had made it into a secret passageway, so that he could get to the field
|
||
without anyone seeing him. Ray also said that the pipe not only led between
|
||
the farmhouse and the field they were in, but to most of the other fields
|
||
on the farm as well. He told them not to be surprised if he suddenly popped
|
||
in to see them, with a wink.
|
||
|
||
The boys walked back to where they had left the tenting. It took them over
|
||
an hour to get the tent up, and before they were even half way through, all
|
||
of them were very hot indeed. The older boy noticed how the other boys
|
||
shorts were sticking to them with sweat. He decided that he would have to
|
||
make the first move. He flopped down on the ground with a sigh, and slipped
|
||
out of his tee-shirt, and pulled of his plimsoles and socks, mopping the
|
||
perspiration from his forehead with his tee-shirt as he did so. He wondered
|
||
if any of the others would look at him and take the hint.
|
||
|
||
Peter looked over at Ray. He noticed the older boy just laying back on the
|
||
grass in only his shorts. Peter wondered if it was just the heat or if he
|
||
had something else in mind. He turned to Frank and Geoff, and indicated
|
||
over in Raymond's' direction. The three of them quickly ducked into the
|
||
tent.
|
||
|
||
When they came out of the tent all three of them had taken off all of
|
||
their clothes and were standing in the sunlight, naked. Raymond could
|
||
hardly believe his eyes! He walked over to the boys, noticing how their
|
||
stiff little winkles were standing proudly to attention, and almost flat
|
||
against their stomachs. He asked them if they had been good boys since he
|
||
had last seen them. Peter said that both he and Frank had been good, but
|
||
that Geoff had been naughty. Geoff shot an angry glance at his friend.
|
||
|
||
Raymond told Geoff to turn around. He had an idea about giving the boy a
|
||
friendly spanking, but when he saw the young boy's bottom, thought better
|
||
of it. There were some very sore looking marks showing, and Ray thought to
|
||
himself that the boy had obviously been well punished for whatever it was
|
||
he had done.
|
||
|
||
Frank asked Ray if it was safe, them not having any clothes on. The older
|
||
boy told him that no-one came to this field as it was not used normally,
|
||
and so they could wear what they liked. He told them that in any case they
|
||
would hear the gate being opened, and that would give them enough time to
|
||
get inside the tent if anyone did come to the field. To prove his point, he
|
||
took off his shorts too, and soon they were all stood there with nothing
|
||
on.
|
||
|
||
Ray suggested that they had better finish putting up the tent, and then
|
||
they could get something to eat. The four boys set back to work, enjoying
|
||
the feeling of the sun on their bare bodies. Pretty soon they had finished
|
||
erecting the tent, and they all lay down on the grass, exhausted.
|
||
|
||
It was only when they were all quiet that they heard sounds coming from
|
||
the other side of the hedge. The sounds of little boys laughing and talking
|
||
came over the top, and the four boys realized that the cubs must have
|
||
arrived of their camp. Raymond carefully walked over to the hedge and
|
||
peered through. He could not see very much, except for the occasional flash
|
||
of dark green cub-scout jersey the other side. He crept over to the others,
|
||
and told them that they had better get dressed. When Geoff asked why,
|
||
Raymond said that as the Cubs had arrived, his mother might just come down
|
||
to see how they were getting on, and she might even come into their field
|
||
to see them. So the boys quickly got their clothes out of the tent and put
|
||
them on. When they were dressed, Ray said that it might be a good idea if
|
||
they went up to the farmhouse, and got ready for tea. The younger boys, who
|
||
were by now quite hungry, quickly agreed.
|
||
CHAPTER TWENTY-ONE
|
||
|
||
When they got to the farmhouse, Raymond's' mother was just about to get
|
||
the tea things ready. She told the boys that she would be going down to the
|
||
Cubs' campsite after tea, and that it might be a good idea if they all went
|
||
down and met each other. The three younger boys didn't really like the idea
|
||
much, but agreed to go all the same. Mrs. Wilder then told them all to go
|
||
and wash their hands and come down to tea.
|
||
|
||
When they had finished their tea, Mrs. Wilder sent them upstairs to have a
|
||
good wash, Raymond too. In the bathroom the boys had fun splashing one
|
||
another, and grabbing hold of each others willies with soapy hands. Soon
|
||
though, all four boys were clean and ready to go and meet the Cubs.
|
||
|
||
They all left the farmhouse an walked along the road to the field where
|
||
the Cubs were camping. They could hear the young voices from quite a
|
||
distance off. Mrs. Wilder told the younger boys that they always camped in
|
||
that particular field so that the could not be heard from the farmhouse,
|
||
not that they were very noisy once they had settled down. The three boys
|
||
were thankful for that, at least.
|
||
|
||
When they arrived at the field, there were about forty boys, all running
|
||
around the tents, playing tag. Every one of them was wearing the green
|
||
Jersey, cap and grey short trousers that was the Cub Scout uniform. Peter
|
||
noticed that he and his two friends could easily be mistaken for one of the
|
||
older Cubs. He wondered a little what the younger boys would make of him.
|
||
|
||
Raymond's' mother took them over to the Cub Scout leaders and introduced
|
||
them all. The leaders said they would be very happy to include the boys in
|
||
any of the activities they liked, and also told them to drop in anytime.
|
||
After a few minutes, however, the Cub leaders said that they had to
|
||
organize the boys tea, and told them to come back any time they liked.
|
||
|
||
They all walked back to the next field. Ray and his mother said that they
|
||
were going back to the farmhouse, and asked if the boys would like to come
|
||
back for a while. Peter said thank you for the invitation, but told them
|
||
that they still had some unpacking to do. Mrs. Wilder said ok, but if there
|
||
was anything they needed, they only had to come to the farm and ask. Ray
|
||
said that he would come to see them in the morning and winked at the boys.
|
||
They had a very good idea why, and had quite a job of trying not to smile
|
||
too obviously. The boys said good bye, and opened the gate and went into
|
||
their field.
|
||
|
||
By now it was getting on for half past six, and the boys felt chilly. They
|
||
sorted out the inside of the tent and have an early night. By eight o'clock
|
||
the three of them were sound asleep.
|
||
|
||
CHAPTER TWENTY-TWO
|
||
|
||
The next morning the boys were awakened early by the sound of noisy voices
|
||
in the next field. It was obvious to the boys that they were not going to
|
||
get much of a chance to lie in with the Cubs in the next field, so they
|
||
pulled back the tent flap and looked out into the field.
|
||
|
||
It was a glorious morning. The sun was already shining into the field, and
|
||
had cleared the dew from the grass. It was really going to be a warm day.
|
||
The boys scrambled out of their sleeping bags and set to getting the
|
||
breakfast ready. none of them bothered about getting dressed, and the three
|
||
of them walked about the field with nothing on, without a care in the
|
||
world. It would have been quite a sight for anyone to see, three boys
|
||
enjoying the morning air as nature intended, free from the restrictions of
|
||
clothing, however brief.
|
||
|
||
When they had finished breakfast and cleared away the cooking stove, the
|
||
boys sat down on the grass to decide what they were going to do that day.
|
||
Geoff suggested that they might explore the countryside on their bikes, but
|
||
neither Frank or Peter felt much like riding around all day. In the end
|
||
they decided to just spend a quiet day in the field, relaxing. Peter
|
||
thought to himself that they would probably get enough excitement that day,
|
||
especially if Raymond came to see them.
|
||
|
||
As it was, it was nearly lunch time before the older boy emerged from the
|
||
tunnel. The three friends were a little disappointed to see that he was
|
||
wearing jeans and an old shirt. He explained to them that he was going to
|
||
have to help his father on the farm for most of the day, and probably would
|
||
not see them until late afternoon.
|
||
|
||
The boys noticed that he had a plastic carrier-bag in his hand. Frank
|
||
asked him what was in it. Raymond told him it was for them, but not to open
|
||
it until he left. The friends were filled with curiosity as to what the
|
||
contents might be. The top of the bag was sealed with sticking tape, but
|
||
the three boys could see that it was quite full, from the way it bulged.
|
||
Raymond put the bag by the side of the tent, and asked the boys what they
|
||
were planning to do for the day. Peter told him they were just going to
|
||
spent the day in the field. Ray suggested to them that they might like to
|
||
get to know the Cubs in the next field, and Peter noticed that the older
|
||
boys' glance turned to the bag as he said it. Peter was now very eager to
|
||
find out what was inside. As Raymond left, he suggested that perhaps the
|
||
boys should put some clothes on, as it was still quite damp. The boys said
|
||
they would as the prefect disappeared back down the tunnel again.
|
||
|
||
After the boy had gone, the three friends decided that it might be a good
|
||
idea if they did put some clothes on, and so all three of them went inside
|
||
the tent to get dressed. They had nearly finished dressing when Geoff
|
||
remembered the carrier bag that Raymond had left at the side of the tent.
|
||
He went outside and brought it in.
|
||
|
||
Peter reached for the bag and all but snatched it out of Geoffs' hand. He
|
||
ripped off the sticky tape that had been used to seal the top and peered
|
||
inside.
|
||
|
||
Peter could hardly believe his eyes! Inside the bag were three Cub scout
|
||
Jerseys, caps and scarves. The scarves he recognized as being the same as
|
||
the ones the boys in the next field were wearing. There were even garter
|
||
tabs for their socks. As he pulled all of the clothing out of the bag, he
|
||
saw there was something else in the bottom of the carrier. There were some
|
||
small books. He took them out and opened one.
|
||
|
||
Inside there were loads of photographs of young boys, some as young
|
||
looking as seven or eight, and they were all in various stages of undress.
|
||
Some of the pictures were of boys playing with their willies, others of two
|
||
boys rubbing each other up, and even some of one boy sticking his winkle up
|
||
another boys' bottom.
|
||
|
||
Peter showed the magazines to his friends. All three of them wondered
|
||
where Raymond had got them from. Geoff opened one to find a series of
|
||
pictures of Cub scouts, at what looked like a camp site, doing all sorts of
|
||
things to each other.
|
||
|
||
Frank looked down at the Cub uniforms on the floor. He suggested to the
|
||
other two that it would be fun to sort of act out the pictures in the book.
|
||
The other two could hardly wait, and in no time at all, all three of them
|
||
were dressed in the Cub uniforms and sat down on the floor looking through
|
||
the books.
|
||
|
||
The boys were so engrossed in looking at the pictures that they almost
|
||
didn't hear the noise outside the tent. Peter hurriedly zipped up his
|
||
shorts and checked to see that his friends were decent before moving
|
||
towards the front of the tent. He thought to himself that it was probably
|
||
Raymond, perhaps he had been able to get his father to let him off working
|
||
on the farm after all.
|
||
|
||
Peter unzipped the flap of the tent, and looked out. There were two
|
||
round-faced nine or ten-year-olds in Cub scout's uniform, staring back at
|
||
them. One of them bashfully asked if they were Blue Six
|
||
|
||
Peter said no, and asked if the boys were lost, hurriedly trying to hide
|
||
the fact that he was dressed the same as the younger boys outside. He
|
||
looked back at his two friends, to make sure they could not be seen, and
|
||
then asked the Cubs where they ought to be.
|
||
|
||
One of the boys said that they were on a wide game and found a tunnel, and
|
||
got lost in it. Just then, he spotted Geoff and Frank hiding in the back of
|
||
the tent. Noticing what they were wearing he asked if they were Cubs too.
|
||
|
||
Peter told the boys that they had better come into the tent. The boys
|
||
crawled inside on their hands and knees, gratefully.
|
||
|
||
The boy Peter had been talking to said his name was Colin, as he crawled
|
||
into the tent. He also introduced the other two boys as Robert and Ian, as
|
||
they crawled in behind him.
|
||
|
||
Just then he looked down on the ground. "I SAY!!!", he cried out
|
||
excitedly, "what's THAT!!!!".
|
||
|
||
He had found one of the books that Raymond had brought in the bag, and the
|
||
three of them had been looking at, still lying there open at the
|
||
centerfold, just as Peter had thrown it aside, when they had heard the
|
||
noise outside.
|
||
|
||
The boy's blue eyes were like saucers as he turned the page. "WOW.......
|
||
isn't this naughty?" he asked as he saw what the boys in the photographs
|
||
were doing.
|
||
|
||
Geoff replied that it wasn't really naughty, as he smiled back at him, but
|
||
it was a lot of fun. Geoff reached out and put his hand on the boys bare
|
||
thigh, just below the edge of his grey cub shorts. He didn't pull away.
|
||
Instead, he turned his head slowly round and looked at his two friends. His
|
||
cheeks were flushed, and his blue eyes searched his friends faces to see
|
||
what they thought.
|
||
|
||
For a moment, no-one spoke. Then his features broke out into a boyish
|
||
grin.
|
||
|
||
Robert started to chuckle. While Geoff had been distracting Colin's
|
||
attention, he had grabbed the book, and was turning the pages over and
|
||
over.
|
||
|
||
He called to Ian to have a look at the book he was now holding. It was a
|
||
series of color pictures of two Cub scouts in uniform, slowly undressing
|
||
each other, right down to their white cotton Y-fronts, and their stiff
|
||
little winkles poking out of the flaps in front... As he turned his head,
|
||
Peter caught his eye, and held it. He asked a little timidly if they could
|
||
stay for a while, adding that it looked like fun, what the boys were doing
|
||
in the book.
|
||
|
||
Without replying, Peter reached round and zipped up the doorway. Then he
|
||
smiled at his two friends. Together, they coaxed the boys down on top of
|
||
the sleeping-bags. Their Cub scout caps came off, and rolled away into the
|
||
far corners of the tent. The younger boys looked up at the friends, and a
|
||
little timidly asked the older boys not to hurt them.
|
||
|
||
The three friends promised they wouldn't, and got the boys lying down on
|
||
their backs, and knelt over them. They began to feel them all over their
|
||
shorts, down to caress the insides of their thighs, going up the legs of
|
||
the shorts into the elastic of their underpants, and further up... between
|
||
their legs to touch the smooth round ball-sacs nestling inside the sweaty
|
||
cotton... round behind them to trace the outline of their pants in the
|
||
crease below their peachy bottoms... making the boys raise their hips and
|
||
wriggle their shorts about sexily... right in front of their faces! The
|
||
three friends could see a little bulge inside each of them.
|
||
|
||
Slowly the boys slid their hand out again and reached for the young boys'
|
||
flies, drawing the zippers down, and found their stiff little winkles, all
|
||
tangled up inside their little white boy's underpants.
|
||
|
||
Gently the older boys eased the elastic waistbands down over them, and
|
||
Peter slowly fondled Colin's warm, dry flesh while his friends did the same
|
||
with the other two Cubs.
|
||
|
||
After they had played with them like that for a little, they asked the
|
||
young Cubs if they were enjoying it. All three of them said yes, and asked
|
||
what else would the older boys do to them.
|
||
|
||
Geoff was the first to act. He had been thinking of all the things he
|
||
would have liked to be able to do to with his younger brother. He rolled
|
||
Ian over onto his side, and laid down in front of him. He took hold of the
|
||
younger boys hand, and put the boys palm against his willy. The youngster,
|
||
not knowing what to do, just left his hand where it had been put, so Geoff
|
||
told him to feel his winkle. The young boy started to run his fingers up
|
||
and down the outside of Geoffs short trousers, and the older boy felt his
|
||
willy getting even harder.
|
||
|
||
Meanwhile, Peter and Frank had rolled the other two Cubs over to lie close
|
||
together, face to face. The boys moaned, and their young bodies begin to
|
||
squirm and rub against each other. Peters' hands were roaming all over
|
||
Colin's grey shorts. They were rucking up into folds around his hips. It
|
||
gave Peter a stiffy to think that he had a Cub scout with his shorts coming
|
||
down, but the grey worsted material was still stretched smooth and tight
|
||
over his sweet boy's bottom. Frank was doing just the same with Robert's.
|
||
|
||
Then the two boys put their arms round each other, their boyish heads
|
||
close together. The two older boys were quite surprised to see half-open
|
||
mouths were seeking one another, kissing with great, wet kisses, as their
|
||
winkles poked and probed against each other's smooth, hairless bodies.
|
||
|
||
Then, out of the corner of his eye, Peter saw what Geoff was doing with
|
||
Ian. He had taken the young boys shorts right down to his knees and had
|
||
done the same to his own, and was rubbing his winkle against the other
|
||
boys' smaller member. The younger lad was moving his hips backwards and
|
||
forwards, almost inviting the older boy to do what he liked. Geoff noticed
|
||
what the youngster was doing. He put his arm around the boys' waist and put
|
||
his hand on his bottom, and squeezed. The young boy gasped a little as
|
||
Geoff lightly touched his index finger against the little boys' bum-hole,
|
||
gently pressing inwards with the tip of his finger. He was quite surprised
|
||
when it slowly slid inside the boy. He could feel the warm, almost sucking
|
||
sensation against it. Geoff thought for a moment, and then removed his
|
||
finger.
|
||
|
||
Gently he moved away from the boy and rolled him onto his tummy. He was
|
||
going to try something he had seen in one of the magazines. He put his hand
|
||
between the boys' legs and gently parted them.
|
||
|
||
When the boys' legs were spread, Geoff knelt between them. He leaned
|
||
forward and put one elbow by the youngsters' arm, and with the other hand,
|
||
took hold of his own winkle. He gently positioned it against the younger
|
||
boys' hole, and very slowly started to press it into the boy.
|
||
|
||
Ian whimpered as the older boys' willy pushed its' way past the opening,
|
||
slowly penetrating him. He had never had anything like this done to him
|
||
before, but he didn't want to stop. Somehow it made him feel very grown up
|
||
to be doing this, and he didn't want to be thought a baby by not doing it.
|
||
Gradually the first pain stopped, and he started to enjoy the feeling of
|
||
another boys' winkle up his bottom, moving backwards and forwards inside
|
||
him. It made his own willy feel all tingly too, and he slowly reached
|
||
underneath himself and took hold of it.
|
||
|
||
Geoff noticed what Ian was doing, and took hold of the boys' hips. Very
|
||
carefully, so as not to come out of the boy, he knelt back, pulling the
|
||
younger boy up into a sort of crawling position as he did so. When he felt
|
||
steady, he put his left arm around the boys' chest, and reached for the
|
||
youngsters' winkle with his right hand. As he pumped in and out of the boy,
|
||
he pumped Ian's winkle at the same time. It felt almost as if his willy was
|
||
going right through the boy, and he was rubbing himself on the other side.
|
||
|
||
Geoff could feel the pressure building up inside him. He knew that very
|
||
soon he was going to shoot, and it would all go up into the boys' bottom.
|
||
He wondered if he should do it, but he was by now too far gone to worry. He
|
||
felt Ian tense and pull away slightly. The young boy said he felt as if he
|
||
was going to go to wee. Geoff told the boy that it was all right, and that
|
||
he wouldn't wee, but get a nice feeling all over in a moment.
|
||
|
||
Ian was not too sure, it really did feel as if he was going to wee. His
|
||
winkle felt tingly, and his tummy felt funny. Still the older boy kept
|
||
pulling his willy though. He was just about to say something to Geoff as he
|
||
felt the older boy shudder. He felt something warm go inside him, and at
|
||
the same time his whole body felt as if it was being tickled, only the
|
||
feeling was so strong it almost hurt. He shivered and shook as all the
|
||
feeling suddenly shot down to his winkle. It felt just like the time he had
|
||
grabbed hold of a plug at home and got an electric shock. All he could feel
|
||
was the tingling, Geoffs winkle in his bottom, and something wet running
|
||
down his leg. For a moment he thought that the older boy had gone to wee in
|
||
his bottom, but as he looked between his legs, he could see a sort of
|
||
creamy stuff slowly sliding down. He felt Geoff suddenly flop down on his
|
||
back, and now spent, he too felt his arms weaken and he fell back to the
|
||
ground.
|
||
|
||
Meanwhile, Peter and Frank had been busy with the other two boys, gripping
|
||
them in all the boys' soft places, squeezing them, pulling at their
|
||
willies, working them up into a frenzy as they lay there, Peters' winkle
|
||
pressed hard into Colin's heaving bottom, slipped down, and lodged itself
|
||
between his thighs.
|
||
|
||
He was going to shoot, the boy's hips were bucking against him, and his
|
||
winkle was rubbing back and forth between the legs of the younger boys half
|
||
pulled-down shorts, right in his crotch. Peter could feel Colin was getting
|
||
near to orgasm too, and his arm went in between the two boys, holding Colin
|
||
tight. The younger boys' whole body jerked convulsively, his muscles tensed
|
||
like a coiled spring, and his thighs gripped Peter so tight in the sticky
|
||
material between his legs that he could hold on no longer. He held on until
|
||
his whole body screamed for release. It felt as if he had released his load
|
||
right into the boy.
|
||
|
||
Peter was quite surprised by Colin too. For such a young boy, a lot of
|
||
juice was spurting out of him, all over himself and the other boy, in a hot
|
||
spray between their naked stomachs, all over their rucked-up green
|
||
Cub-scout's Jerseys, over their white underpants, their legs, everywhere.
|
||
Peter could also feel Frank shooting his load onto Robert's bottom, soaking
|
||
that boy's shorts as well.
|
||
|
||
Peter sat up to look at their handiwork, the two boys lying there
|
||
completely spent, with their smart Cub-scout uniforms in wild disorder and
|
||
covered with sweat and cum.
|
||
|
||
The three friends looked at the younger boys. Peter said that they were
|
||
very naughty to have got all those marks on their uniforms, and asked the
|
||
younger boys what they thought they ought to do about it.
|
||
|
||
Colin spoke. He said that if he got his clothes dirty at home, then his
|
||
daddy smacked him, and he supposed that they should do the same. Peter
|
||
asked the three of them if they were sure, and when they all said yes, he
|
||
knelt down to begin.
|
||
|
||
The three boys turned them over to lie on their stomachs. Peter yanked
|
||
Colin's soaked shorts, and his white underpants along with them, down to
|
||
mid-thigh. Then Frank and Geoff leaned over and pulled down Robert's and
|
||
Ian's shorts as well. Ian's tight pants stayed in position, so Frank
|
||
slowly, lovingly, rolled back the white cotton, pulling them inside out
|
||
right down to his knees.
|
||
|
||
They spanked the three boys as they lay there, side by side, the palms of
|
||
their hands coming down hard in quick succession, one.. two.. left..
|
||
right.. on their chubby bottom-cheeks. Never had the three friends heard
|
||
such gasps of pleasure-pain, and then such cries of frankly ecstatic pain
|
||
as they saw those three naked bottoms slowly pinken under that hail of
|
||
slaps. Their bodies squirmed on the sleeping bags, but the shorts clinging
|
||
half-way down their legs held them in position.
|
||
|
||
They went on till the tears were pouring down the younger boys' pretty
|
||
cheeks. Then they started to gently rub the younger boys' bottoms, soothing
|
||
them.
|
||
|
||
Colin turned his tearstained face to Peter and smiled. He said he had
|
||
liked it a lot, and the other two boys agreed.
|
||
|
||
It was also Colin who noticed the stain on Peters' shorts. He said that it
|
||
was only fair that they should get the same punishment. So the three
|
||
friends laid down on their sleeping bags, waiting for the youngsters so
|
||
smack them.
|
||
|
||
The cubs pulled down the older boys shorts and underpants, and began to
|
||
spank them. They were not very hard smacks, but were enough to get the
|
||
older boys excited again. Peter could feel a stirring underneath him again.
|
||
How he had enjoyed the mornings fun. He hoped they would be able to do it
|
||
again before the end of the holiday.
|
||
|
||
When the young boys grew tired of smacking the friends' bottoms they sat
|
||
down again on the sleeping bags next to them. All the boys looked at the
|
||
Cubs uniforms. They were well splattered with boy-cum and looked quite a
|
||
mess. The three Cubs were now feeling a little afraid of what their Akela
|
||
would say when she saw the marks. The were sure that they would get into
|
||
trouble. It was Peter who suggested that maybe they could wash the shorts
|
||
out. Colin said that was a good idea, but that they would not dry out in
|
||
time. There was obviously a problem.
|
||
|
||
Frank finally sorted it out. He looked at the younger boys and then at his
|
||
friends. They all seemed to be about the same size. He suggested that they
|
||
could lend the Cubs their spare short trousers while they washed the other
|
||
ones. All the boys agreed, and Frank, Peter and Geoff went over to their
|
||
rucksacks and pulled out their spare grey shorts.
|
||
|
||
The young Cubs quickly took off their stained shorts and put on the ones
|
||
the older boys were offering them. In no time they were dressed again. The
|
||
shorts fitted quite well, except for Ian's, which were just a little looser
|
||
than his own, but were luckily not too big. The older boys quickly mopped
|
||
off the little marks that were on the young lads' jerseys, and in no time
|
||
at all the three younger boys looked as smart as they had done when they
|
||
had crawled into the tent. Peter told them that they had better go, or they
|
||
might be missed. The three Cubs said ok, but asked if they could come to
|
||
see them again if they got a chance. The three friends said of course they
|
||
could, any time they liked. The younger boys smiled, and left the tent.
|
||
|
||
Just for a laugh, the three friends put on the younger boys' shorts and
|
||
settled down to finish looking at the books. It wasn't long before they
|
||
became even more badly stained than ever.
|
||
CHAPTER TWENTY-THREE
|
||
|
||
Raymond did not turn up that afternoon. The boys sat around in their cub
|
||
uniforms, with the younger boys stained trousers for most of the day. They
|
||
lay on the grass, reading. Not one of the boys had any thoughts of sex for
|
||
hours, they just wanted to enjoy the sunshine. At lunchtime, They cooked
|
||
themselves a light snack on the calor gas stove, and ate it in the shade of
|
||
the green canvas tent awning.
|
||
|
||
By about two o'clock the heat in their field had become almost unbearable
|
||
again, due to the fact that there were no cooling breezes that could
|
||
penetrate the dense, high, hedges that surrounded them. One by one the boys
|
||
tripped off, and just lazed around, totally naked. If anyone had been in a
|
||
position to watch the boys that afternoon, they would surely have noticed
|
||
the almost regular tumescence and detumescence of the boys' members, but it
|
||
was probably due to subconscious thoughts rather than any conscious whims
|
||
or fancies of the three.
|
||
|
||
It was Peter who finally suggested that they really ought to wash the
|
||
young cubs' shorts. He got out the big bowl they used for washing the
|
||
dishes, and put a kettle on the camp-stove to heat some water. Frank
|
||
pointed out that they had not brought any washing powder with them. Geoff
|
||
suggested using washing up liquid, as long as they rinsed them out
|
||
thoughroughly afterwards.
|
||
|
||
While Peter was washing the short trousers, Geoff and Frank rigged up a
|
||
makeshift washing line to dry them on. They hung the shorts on the line,
|
||
and within half an hour they were dry. The next problem the boys had was
|
||
how to get the creases out. They decided the best thing to do was to put
|
||
them under their sleeping bags that night and sleep on them, and hopefully
|
||
that would press them.
|
||
|
||
For the rest of the afternoon, the boys put on a tee-shirt and a pair of
|
||
their tight play-shorts and went off on their bicycles to explore the
|
||
countryside. They rode down to the village, and up to the old castle, and
|
||
spent a very happy afternoon together just wandering around the old
|
||
building. At five o'clock they decided that it was about time to get back,
|
||
and so they went and collected their bicycles and rode down the hill and
|
||
back to the farm, oblivious to the admiring glances they were getting from
|
||
men as they rode back to the camp.
|
||
|
||
When they finally got back to their field, it was beginning to cool a
|
||
little, so Geoff got the tea ready whilst Peter and Frank tidied up the
|
||
tent ready for bed. They remembered to put the Cubs' short trousers under
|
||
the sleeping bags, and when they had finished their tea, they washed up the
|
||
pots and pans, put them away, and all three of them crawled into their
|
||
sleeping bags and slept a deep dreamful sleep, all about Cub scouts!
|
||
|
||
When they awoke next morning, the first thing the boys did was to look
|
||
under the sleeping bags to check how the shorts had pressed. They were
|
||
amazed to find that they were in fact so well pressed that they looked like
|
||
new. The three boys decided that they could not give them back to the boys
|
||
like that, because they had looked a bit untidy when the younger boys had
|
||
had them on the day before, and so they decided that they would wear them
|
||
for a couple of hours, just to make them look more natural. Having taken
|
||
off their pajamas, the three boys put on fresh vests and underpants and
|
||
slipped into the shorts. Geoff suggested that they might as well put on the
|
||
rest of the cub uniforms that Raymond had brought them as well, and so it
|
||
was as three Cub Scouts that they finally emerged from the tent, right in
|
||
front of Raymond, stood outside the tent.
|
||
|
||
For a few moments not a word was said. Raymond just stared at the three
|
||
boys, admiring the way they looked, in their trim little uniforms. The
|
||
three friends noticed that raymond was wearing the uniform of a cub scout
|
||
leader. They could not, however imagine why, or what he had planned.
|
||
|
||
Raymond asked them if they had had breakfast yet. When the three boys said
|
||
that they had not, he told them to get something together quickly, as he
|
||
had decided that they should all go out for the day. He told them that he
|
||
had the whole day free, and that he thought that it might be fun for all of
|
||
them to go out, pretending to be a Cub Scout Leader and some cubs. Peter
|
||
said that sounded like a nice idea, but wasn't it a bit dangerous? What
|
||
would happen if they were seen by a real group of cubs? They might get into
|
||
an awful lot of trouble.
|
||
|
||
Raymond explained that the Cubs would be going on a field trip , and that
|
||
the four of them would be going in a different direction entirely, so there
|
||
would be no possibility of them being taken for anything other than what
|
||
they appeared to be.
|
||
|
||
He suggested that they might go up to the old fortress and explore the
|
||
tunnels. The three friends said that sounded like an excellent idea, and
|
||
quickly set about getting their breakfast ready.
|
||
|
||
Just as they were finishing breakfast, Colin, Ian and Richard came through
|
||
the tunnel into the field. They walked over to the boys and said good
|
||
morning. They looked nervously at Raymond, who they had taken to be a Cub
|
||
Leader.
|
||
|
||
Peter told them that it was alright, that Raymond was their friend, and
|
||
asked them how their day had been. Ian giggled, saying that he had had a
|
||
bit of trouble with his shorts, as they were a little big, and kept falling
|
||
down.
|
||
|
||
Raymond did not quite understand what was happening. He was even more
|
||
surprised when Geoff said that maybe they had better swap back, and all six
|
||
boys started taking off their short trousers. It was only as the boys began
|
||
exchanging shorts with one another that he began to get an idea of what was
|
||
happening. Raymond took Peter to one side and asked him what had happened
|
||
with the boys the previous day. Peter looked a little bashful, but in the
|
||
end told the older boy what had happened. Ray asked Peter if he thought the
|
||
boys could be trusted. Peter said he thought so, and asked the boy why.
|
||
|
||
Raymond said that he had an idea. He told Peter to wait for him, and to
|
||
keep the other boys there as well. Peter said he would, and watched as the
|
||
older boy quickly disappeared down the tunnel. Peter walked back over to
|
||
the other boys, and they finished exchanging their shorts.
|
||
|
||
CHAPTER TWENTY-FOUR
|
||
|
||
It was about an hour before Raymond re-appeared out of the tunnel. He ran
|
||
over to the boys who were sat outside the tent, all avidly staring at the
|
||
naughty books that he had left the previous day. He asked them if they
|
||
would all like to go to the old fortress, including the three cubs. He
|
||
explained that he had asked their Akela if it would be alright if they went
|
||
with him, and had been given permission to take them with him. He had also
|
||
been given their packed lunches that they would have taken with them on
|
||
their field-trip.
|
||
|
||
The three youngest boys could hardly believe their ears! They had not
|
||
really wanted to go on the cub trip, and here they were, being given the
|
||
chance to go out with their three new friends. They all said thank you to
|
||
Raymond, and he suggested that they all leave now, before the rest of the
|
||
cubs started moving. Raymond went to the gate, peered out along the lane,
|
||
and waving the boys on led them up the lane to the old fort.
|
||
|
||
Peter, Frank and Geoff could hardly contain themselves. They felt quite
|
||
strange, wearing Cub scout uniform out in the open. They all felt as if
|
||
they were being very naughty. Especially since they ran the risk, how ever
|
||
slim, of being found out. They knew though, that that was all part of the
|
||
enjoyment. They could behave just like eight or nine year olds, and nobody
|
||
would take the slightest bit of notice. For the first time since the whole
|
||
ordeal began, Peter felt really contented in his short trousers. He was
|
||
among friends, and had the acceptance of boys much younger than himself,
|
||
who were not the least bit interested in the fact that he was older than
|
||
them. As far as they were concerned, he was just another Cub. That, more
|
||
than anything else, made Peter feel very glad.
|
||
|
||
By ten thirty, the boys arrived at the fort. There were quite a few people
|
||
there already, but no-one took the slightest interest in the boys. They
|
||
spent the rest of the morning exploring around the fort, playing hide and
|
||
seek in the large caves around the foot of the battlements, and generally
|
||
enjoying themselves. Frank had managed to fall over and graze his knee, and
|
||
I;m sure that if anyone at that point had seen his face, they would quite
|
||
well have believed that he was only nine years old. It was very painful,
|
||
and his face was screwed up in the sort of way that a child's does when
|
||
they have hurt themselves, with tiny tears just catching in the corners of
|
||
his eyes. Colin gave him his handkerchief to wipe it with, and after a few
|
||
moments he was up and running around with the rest of them again.
|
||
|
||
By mid-day the six younger boys were feeling quite hungry, and they sat
|
||
down on the grass to eat their lunch. Raymond sat with them. He had not
|
||
joined in with their games, as he felt he was to old for that sort of
|
||
thing. He didn't quite understand how Peter, Frank and Geoff could still
|
||
find enjoyment in playing games like hide and seek, and wondered if perhaps
|
||
being kept in shorts wasn't somehow affecting them. Anyway, it was a nice
|
||
sunny day, and they were happy, so what did it matter. He had noticed once
|
||
or twice that Peter's hands were going in places where they shouldn't
|
||
really be, in public that is. He didn't mind what they got up to in the
|
||
privacy of the field, but if someone saw him doing it out here, it could
|
||
cause problems. He had told the boy not to do it, but he could see Peter's
|
||
hand starting to travel up the leg of Colin's shorts again.
|
||
|
||
That did it. Raymond stood up, and catching Peter by the arm, pulled him
|
||
to his feet and smacked him hard on the backs of his thighs. The older boy
|
||
was stunned by the reaction of the younger. Peter's lip started quivering,
|
||
and he shouted at Raymond that he didn't like him anymore. Raymond told
|
||
Peter to stop acting so childish, but the boy just started blubbing,
|
||
sobbing that he wasn't his friend any more, so there.
|
||
|
||
It was probably the worst moment that anything like that could have
|
||
happened. Just at that point, Bill Marsh and Stephen Evans, two boys from
|
||
Peter's form at school, walked around the corner of the cave. They saw what
|
||
had happened, and Peter's reaction. They could hardly believe the sight in
|
||
front of them, three of their own form, fifteen year olds, dressed as cub
|
||
scouts, with one of the school prefects looking like a cub master, and to
|
||
cap it all, three more boys in cub uniform as well. And Peter getting his
|
||
legs smacked. The two boys rolled with laughter, both of them snapping away
|
||
with their cameras at the scene in front of them.
|
||
|
||
Raymond told them to come to him, but they just laughed and ran back round
|
||
the side of the cave. He chased after them, but by the time that he got
|
||
round the corner, they had disappeared. Raymond just knew that those two
|
||
boys would make trouble!
|
||
|
||
Raymond went back to the boys, and told them that they had better return
|
||
to the farm. The three cubs did not understand what had happened, but
|
||
Peter, Frank and Geoff all knew that this would not be the last they would
|
||
hear about their day out on a Cub trip!
|
||
|
||
CHAPTER TWENTY-FIVE
|
||
|
||
The very next morning, Peter, Frank and Geoff packed up the tent and left
|
||
for home. They went up to the farm and said goodbye to Raymond and his
|
||
parents, and as they rode back down the lane, they popped in to say goodbye
|
||
to the cubs. Raymond had told them to keep the uniforms and books he had
|
||
given them for the rest of the holidays, and that they could return them
|
||
when they all got back to school at the end of the holiday. The three boys
|
||
said o.k, but none of them were really in much of a disposition to be that
|
||
grateful for the loan of something which may very well have caused them all
|
||
sorts of future problems.
|
||
|
||
The three boys cycled home in almost total silence. None of them felt very
|
||
happy with the way the trip had ended, and all three boys were wondering
|
||
what would be the outcome of that fateful trip to the fort. They arrived
|
||
home in very low spirits indeed!
|
||
|
||
When Peter and Frank got home, David asked them how the camping had gone.
|
||
The two boys said it had been alright, but neither of them had sounded very
|
||
enthusiastic. David wondered what had happened. He thought that they would
|
||
have had a great time. He had been imagining all the things the three of
|
||
them would have been getting up to, wishing he could have gone with them.
|
||
He had loved what His brother and Frank had done to him the weekend before,
|
||
and hoped that it might happen again. He was not to know that it had been
|
||
because of that sort of thing that they had decided to come home early.
|
||
|
||
The three friends went up to Peter's room. They sat down on the beds and
|
||
thought about the holiday. They all agreed it had been good most of the
|
||
time, if only the last day had not been so horrific. How could they ever
|
||
show their faces again. If only Evans and Marsh had not turned up, it would
|
||
have been all right, but now everyone would hear about it, and they would
|
||
get a lot of stick at school from the other boys. The humiliation of it
|
||
all!
|
||
|
||
David came into the room just as Geoff was getting ready to go. The young
|
||
boy walked straight over to his brother and sat down beside him.. He
|
||
started rubbing the front of his older brother's shorts, but Peter just
|
||
brushed his hand away. He was in no mood to be felt up by his younger
|
||
brother today of all days. David looked at his elder brother a little
|
||
strangely, and then turned and walked moodily out of the room.
|
||
|
||
The three boys sat on the beds for a few more moments and then Geoff said
|
||
he really must leave. Peter and Frank went downstairs with him and watched
|
||
him as he cycled down the drive.
|
||
|
||
The two boys went back upstairs to the bedroom. They unpacked their
|
||
rucksacks and started sorting out their clothes into two piles, one for
|
||
washing and the other for putting away. Peter suddenly stopped, staring
|
||
into the bottom of his bag. Frank looked over at his friend, wondering what
|
||
was wrong. Peter slowly drew out the plastic carrier bag he had stuffed at
|
||
the bottom of his rucksack when they had so hurriedly packed, back at the
|
||
farm. Franks' face fell as he saw it. Both boys were wondering what they
|
||
should do with it, when David walked back into the room again. He
|
||
immediately noticed that something was wrong, and asked Peter what was in
|
||
the carrier bag. Peter tried to stuff it back into the rucksack, telling
|
||
his brother that it was just dirty clothes, but David was dying to find out
|
||
what was inside it, and grabbed it out of his older brother's hand before
|
||
he could do anything about it, spilling the contents all over the bedroom
|
||
floor.
|
||
|
||
The three boys stared down at the mess of clothing and magazines scattered
|
||
across the bedroom floor. Peter and Frank stood there aghast, wondering
|
||
what the younger boy would make of it all. Their silent questions were soon
|
||
answered when David knelt down and picked up one of the little glossy
|
||
magazines. It had fallen open at a page showing two schoolboys in full
|
||
uniform, bent over a farm gate with their short trousers and underpants
|
||
around their knees, and two young farm workers pressing their cocks against
|
||
the young boys' bottoms. David stood up, staring at the photograph, and his
|
||
hand slowly went down to his fly, gently stroking over the front of his
|
||
shorts, as his hips moved in an extremely erotic fashion. The boy was
|
||
obviously getting very excited by it.
|
||
|
||
Peter tried to snatch the book away from his brother, but David just
|
||
stuffed it down the front of his shorts, and told Peter that if he wanted
|
||
it, he would have to get it. Peter, stunned, just stared at his brother for
|
||
a moment, and then, almost as if coming out of a deep sleep, realized what
|
||
his young brother meant. He wanted Peter to rape him!
|
||
|
||
The older boy tried to talk David into giving him back the book, but he
|
||
just hopped and danced around him, just tantalizingly out of reach of his
|
||
brother's hands. In the end Peter got quite worked up too. The shock of the
|
||
previous day had put all thoughts of sex out of his mind, but now he could
|
||
feel his willy getting hard in his pants at the thought of thrusting his
|
||
attentions on his young sibling. He made a grab for David, and caught him
|
||
by the arm.
|
||
|
||
He yelled to Frank to get nylon rope they had used as a washing line out
|
||
of his rucksack as he struggled with his younger brother, twisting his arm
|
||
up behind his back to stop him from getting away. He was determined to have
|
||
his way with this little boy, and nothing was going to stop him. He pushed
|
||
David down onto the bed and sat on him while Frank hurriedly pulled the
|
||
long length of rope out of the bag.
|
||
|
||
Peter grabbed hold of the waistband of his brother's shorts and wrenched
|
||
them down to his ankles, dragging his underpants down with them. David was
|
||
still struggling, and by now in fear, as he was a little scared of what his
|
||
brother was going to do. He had never been tied up before, and was afraid
|
||
of what he had started.
|
||
|
||
Frank quickly pulled the boy's shorts and pants off of his feet and tied
|
||
one end of the rope to his left ankle, running it up and over the headboard
|
||
of the bed, and pulled it out at the bottom, between the mattress and the
|
||
base of the board. Peter grabbed the rope and forcing his brother's left
|
||
arm up to the top of the bed, tied it around his wrist. Frank then ran the
|
||
rope around the back of the headboard from left to right, and tied the
|
||
younger boy's right hand up to it, and after passing the rope back under
|
||
the headboard again pulled it up over the top and finally secured the end
|
||
of it to David's right ankle.
|
||
|
||
When the two older boys were sure they had secured David firmly, they
|
||
stepped back to admire their handiwork. The young boy's arms were pulled
|
||
wide against the edges of the headboard, forcing his head against the board
|
||
so that he had no choice but to stare down at his now rampant winkle,
|
||
whilst his legs were pulled up, so that his feet were almost hooked over
|
||
the top corners of the headboard, with his bottom raised up, seductively,
|
||
just begging to be filled. Peter said that a target like that should not be
|
||
ignored, and went over to the wardrobe and came back with one of his
|
||
brother's black, slip-on plimsoles. He stood to one side of the bed and
|
||
gave his brother six hearty whacks with it, watching the way his brother
|
||
bucked against his restraints on each blow. Peter by now was getting very
|
||
horny indeed, as was Frank.
|
||
|
||
The two boys stripped right off, and hurriedly slipped into the cub
|
||
uniforms that were still strewn across the bedroom floor. Peter noticed a
|
||
pair of Y-fronts that had belonged to one of the cubs, with yellow marks on
|
||
them where the young boy had shot in his pants. He picked them up and
|
||
sniffed them. They smelt beautifully of young boy sex, and he leant over
|
||
the bed and pulled them over his brothers head, arranging them so that the
|
||
younger boy's mouth and nose were in direct contact with the crotch of
|
||
them, but so that he could see out through the legbands. He then came round
|
||
to the end of the bed and stood on the end of it, rubbing his hands up and
|
||
down the front of the little grey shorts he was wearing. He had
|
||
deliberately left off his underpants, and as he undid the waistband and fly
|
||
buttons, his stiff little prick jumped out of it's enclosure and stood out
|
||
from his body like a short pink poker, framed in the V of white and grey of
|
||
his short trousers.
|
||
|
||
He dropped to his knees and Frank passed him the tube of vaseline cream.
|
||
Peter smoothed a glob of it onto the tip of his willy, and then pressed the
|
||
end of the tube against his brother's bottom hole, giving it a hearty
|
||
squeeze. The white cream oozed out of the side of the hole and Frank leant
|
||
over and with his index finger worked it into David's hole, the young boy
|
||
squirmed against the violation of his body, but Frank just continued,
|
||
grabbing the boy's stiff willy in his other had, pumping it up and down
|
||
roughly.
|
||
|
||
Peter put the tube down on the side of the bed and slowly eased himself
|
||
into position, adjusting slightly so that his willy was on a direct line
|
||
with his brother's now slackened hole. He pressed it against the boy's
|
||
ring, and felt the muscle suddenly give under the pressure and he was
|
||
inside. David screamed as it went in, but there was nothing he could do to
|
||
stop it, and no-one to hear his pleas, as they were the only three people
|
||
in the house.
|
||
|
||
Peter started to pump in and out of his brothers bottom, and reached round
|
||
his brother's leg and took hold of the boy's winkle, pumping it in time
|
||
with his own thrusts, as if he were going in one side and wanking himself
|
||
on the other. He felt something brush his knee and saw Frank moving the
|
||
tube of cream, he thought no more of it until he felt the back of his own
|
||
shorts being taken down, and the thrill of expectation as he felt Frank
|
||
push his willy into his bottom. All three boys now were in a sort of sexy
|
||
boy daisy-chain. Peter was a mass of sensations, the willy in his hand, the
|
||
feel of power at having his own brother totally at his command, and the
|
||
exquisite pain of his best friend giving him a seeing to as well pushed him
|
||
over the edge, his whole body was awash with the most powerful orgasm he
|
||
had ever had, and he felt the spunk rushing out of his winkle as Frank's
|
||
rushed up into his bottom, and David trickled boy juice through his
|
||
fingers. It looked almost like a filtration plant, with the juice, thick
|
||
and creamy rushing out of one boy, through the middle one, finally emerging
|
||
from the youngster as a clear, pre-seminal juice. Frank collapsed, spent,
|
||
onto the back of his friend, and Peter fell forward against his brother, a
|
||
mass of exhausted, happy boyhood, the only thing between the two brothers
|
||
lips the sweet scented cloth of a cub scouts soiled Y-fronts.
|
||
CHAPTER TWENTY-SIX
|
||
|
||
The boys spent most of Saturday getting ready for the journey the next day
|
||
back to school. Geoff had called round earlier in the day with a message
|
||
from his father, who would be going past the school on his way up to
|
||
London, and asked if Peter and Frank would like to go by car. The two boys
|
||
said they would like that very much. Geoff told them that they would call
|
||
for them at about two o'clock the next afternoon, and waving goodbye,
|
||
mounted his bike and rode down the drive. Peter and Frank went back
|
||
upstairs to continue packing their cases. They put their new short trouser
|
||
suits in the bottom first, so that they would not crease, and then laid
|
||
their playshorts and sports kit on top. They did not pack their uniforms as
|
||
they would have to wear them to go back to school. Finally they piled their
|
||
underwear, socks, jumpers and shoes on top and closed and fastened the case
|
||
lids. Frank asked Peter if he thought there would be any trouble when they
|
||
got back to school with Bill Marsh and Stephen Evans, and the photographs.
|
||
Peter said he hoped not, but if there was, Raymond would have to help them,
|
||
as he was as involved as they were. He just hoped that he was right. They
|
||
changed into their plimsoles and went out into the garden.
|
||
|
||
The next morning, all three boys woke early. David would not be leaving
|
||
until late that afternoon, as his school was not all that far away, but as
|
||
Peter and Frank were going just after lunch, they decided that they would
|
||
have to make the most of the morning they had together. David asked Peter
|
||
if he could go to the hide in the woods with them and play bottoms again.
|
||
Frank said that was a good idea, and all three of them dressed quickly and
|
||
rushed down to breakfast. They had a very quick snack and the three boys
|
||
got out their bicycles and rode across the field to the woods. Peter
|
||
suggested that they could call on Geoff and find out if he would like to
|
||
join in. David said he didn't mind, as long as Graham could come too. The
|
||
two older boys were a bit surprised by David request, after what Geoff had
|
||
told them the day they had gone to the farm, and asked the younger boy why
|
||
he wanted Geoff's brother to come along too.
|
||
|
||
David told them that one day last term, he had been sent on an errand by
|
||
the sports master, to get some cricket stumps out of the Games store. As he
|
||
got to the store, he heard noises inside, and as the door was open a
|
||
fraction, he had peeked inside, just in case it was robbers or something.
|
||
What he did see was Graham, and two other boys, sat on the floor on top of
|
||
a fourth, and they were stripping his clothes off and making him do dirty
|
||
things to them. He could tell by the way the boys were talking that Graham
|
||
was the ringleader, and what had made David really angry was that the boy
|
||
on the floor was his best friend. Not knowing what he should do, David had
|
||
tiptoed away from the shed a short distance, and then, making as much noise
|
||
as he could, slowly walked up to the shed again.
|
||
|
||
By the time he got to the shed again, and opened the door, the boys were
|
||
all dressed again, and were pretending to look for a cricket net. They had
|
||
asked him what he was doing there, and he told them that he had been sent
|
||
by the Games Master to help him get some equipment, and had they seen him
|
||
yet, because he was supposed to meet him here. At that, the four boys said
|
||
no, they hadn't seen him, and that the net they were looking for must be
|
||
somewhere else, and they quickly made their exit, fearful of being caught
|
||
somewhere they ought not to be.
|
||
|
||
Peter and Frank could hardly believe their ears. Geoff had been humiliated
|
||
by his brother, and had thought there had been no way to get his own back.
|
||
It now appeared that there was a good chance to get even, and even David
|
||
had an axe to grind with the boy. The morning could turn out to be more fun
|
||
than either of the two older boys could possibly have imagined.
|
||
|
||
When the three of them arrived at Geoff's house, both he and Graham were
|
||
out in the front garden, cleaning their bikes. Peter asked them if they
|
||
would both like to go for a ride with them, and Geoff said that he would
|
||
have to ask his father, and rushed inside to ask if it was alright. If
|
||
Graham noticed the strange way the three boys were looking at him, he
|
||
didn't show it: he just finished putting the chain back on his bike, and
|
||
waited for his brother to come back out of the house.
|
||
|
||
Geoff came out and walked over to his bike. He said that they could go,
|
||
but must be back by twelve o'clock for dinner. Peter said that they would
|
||
be back in plenty of time, and all five boys rode down the drive to the
|
||
road.
|
||
|
||
When they got to the woods, Peter stopped his bike and got off. He knelt
|
||
down beside his bike and pretended to be adjusting the chain. He called
|
||
over to Geoff to help him, telling the others to go on ahead. Frank and the
|
||
two younger boys rode off in the direction of the Hide, and Geoff knelt
|
||
down to see what problem Peter was having.
|
||
|
||
Peter quickly told his friend about what David had said, and He could tell
|
||
that Geoff was starting to get a little angry. He had never imagined that
|
||
his brother had been that sort, and he was furious that he had been shamed
|
||
in such a indecent manner by his young brother. Peter told him to calm
|
||
down, as they would all help him to get his own back on the objectionable
|
||
little creep. They got back on their bikes and rode off after the others.
|
||
|
||
When they got to the hide, they were not at all surprised to find that the
|
||
other two had already set to on the young boy. They found him stark naked,
|
||
tied ankle to wrist, hanging between two overhanging branches like a
|
||
trussed turkey. Frank and David were swinging him backwards and forwards
|
||
like a pendulum, about two and a half feet from the ground. As he swung
|
||
back towards the boys, they were flogging him unmercifully with twigs on
|
||
his bare behind.
|
||
|
||
Geoff saw immediately the possibilities. With his hands and feet bound
|
||
together, spread wide apart by the tightness of the ropes, there was
|
||
absolutely no way his brother could struggle, he could only hang there, in
|
||
that degrading fashion, whilst absolutely anything could, and soon would be
|
||
done to him. He walked over and took hold of his brothers winkle, which,
|
||
although the boy was obviously terrified, was stood out rigid from his
|
||
groin. Geoff swung the boy backwards and forwards, using his willy as a
|
||
handle, all the time ignoring his brothers screams. The other boys by now
|
||
had started stripping off, and David rushed forwards and stuffed Graham's
|
||
underpants into his mouth to keep him quiet, pulling his own over the young
|
||
brats' head in much the same manner as had been done to him.
|
||
|
||
Having quietened the boy down, Peter, Frank and David quickly took down
|
||
Geoffs shorts and pants, and anointed the captives' bum-hole with cream,
|
||
preparing it for invasion. Geoff rammed home into his brother, causing the
|
||
boy to buck violently against the ropes, which only served to skewer him
|
||
further onto his brother's hard, throbbing prick. The other three boys set
|
||
to work. Peter went round behind Geoff and entered him, while Frank did the
|
||
same to him.
|
||
|
||
David had different ideas. He stood at the Graham's head, and slowly
|
||
peeled the underpants out of the boys' mouth. He then inserted his willy
|
||
into the opening in the y-fronts over the boys head and nudged it against
|
||
the boy's lips. Graham tried to resist the pressure against his mouth, but
|
||
finally, the last of his resistance gone, gave way to the hard flesh that
|
||
was thrusting at his face. David felt it slip between the boys lips, into a
|
||
hot moist throat. He told Graham to suck it like a lollipop. He was
|
||
remembering what he had seen that day in the Games store. He felt the
|
||
draught of the boy's breath against his little boy-balls as his willy was
|
||
thrust further into the boys mouth by the pressure form the other end of
|
||
the prisoners body, and the sensations were driving him wild. He reached
|
||
forwards and grabbed hold of the other young boy's sex and pumped it
|
||
furiously.
|
||
|
||
Geoff told Peter and Frank not to shoot as he wanted them to empty
|
||
themselves into Graham, so that he was full of their boy juice. The two
|
||
boys withdrew, and as both David and Geoff emptied themselves into the boy,
|
||
gently rubbed themselves to keep hard for their turn. Frank then took
|
||
Geoff's place, while Peter took over from his now exhausted younger
|
||
brother.
|
||
|
||
Whilst Peter and Frank emptied their loads into Graham, David and Geoff
|
||
rubbed themselves hard again and set to on Graham. David was unable to
|
||
shoot again, But Geoff produced a second load and squirted it all over his
|
||
brother's cock and balls, and then rubbed it into the boy's flesh, making
|
||
him sticky and bringing him off all over his chest. Peter shot so much and
|
||
so hard that the boy had no option but to swallow it, but still some
|
||
trickled out of the corners of his lips, back onto Peter's balls. Frank
|
||
spent himself into the now slimy cavity that was the boy's bum- hole,
|
||
shuddering as each jet of boy-cum shot out of the end of his stiff willy.
|
||
|
||
All four boys collapsed on the ground, spent. Graham just hung from the
|
||
ropes, dripping sperm from his bum, covered in a thick sticky amalgam of
|
||
the boys' love juices. He looked exactly like what he was, a pitiful little
|
||
slut, whose body had been raped and violated and abused, an insignificant
|
||
sex object for the satisfaction of the four boys now laying beneath him.
|
||
|
||
When the boys had sufficiently recovered, they dressed, and cut Graham
|
||
down. When they had untied him, he just lay on the ground sobbing. He was
|
||
ashamed of himself, and full or remorse for what he had done, and he asked
|
||
the four boys to forgive him. He knelt up and buried his face in his
|
||
brother's shorts, and pleaded with him to forgive him for what he had done.
|
||
|
||
Geoff looked down at the boy. Having taught him a lesson he was sure the
|
||
boy would not forget for a long while, he no longer felt any animosity
|
||
towards him. He knelt down and kissed him, and said that he forgave him,
|
||
but that he must learn not to be nasty or spiteful to people, otherwise it
|
||
might happen to him again, and next time he might not get off so light.
|
||
Graham promised everyone that he would not be so horrible in future, and
|
||
that he would not force his attentions on anyone, unless they wanted it
|
||
too. He turned to David, and very sheepishly asked if the could still be
|
||
friends. In answer, David knelt down in front of the boy, and taking hold
|
||
of his willy whist he did so, kissed the boy full on the lips, the salty
|
||
taste of boy-cum assailing his tongue as he slowly inserted it into the
|
||
other boy's warm, receptive mouth.
|
||
|
||
Geoff looked at his watch. It was nearly twelve o'clock. He gathered up
|
||
his brother;s clothes and helped the young boy get dressed, pulling his
|
||
Y-fronts and shorts up as he put on his vest and shirt. When he was decent
|
||
again, the five boys got back on their bikes and rode home to Geoff's
|
||
house. If Graham rode home standing on the pedals rather than sat on the
|
||
saddle, nobody could blame him, and all understood why. That particular
|
||
area would be a little uncomfortable for quite a while. They arrived at the
|
||
house, and Peter, Frank and David waved goodbye as they rode off home. The
|
||
two older boys could tell by the happy expression on David's face that the
|
||
next term would be a lot happier for him, and who knew, perhaps his
|
||
schoolwork would improve too!
|
||
|
||
CHAPTER TWENTY-SEVEN
|
||
|
||
It was quite late when the three boys arrived back at school. They were
|
||
met by their Form Master, Mr. Walters, who told them that they had all been
|
||
moved to the same dormitory, by request of Peter's father. The three boys
|
||
were happy. It meant that they could be together more often, and perhaps it
|
||
might make things easier for them too. The climbed the stairs to the dorm
|
||
and walked in. They unpacked their clothes and put them away in their
|
||
lockers and got ready for bed.
|
||
|
||
The next morning the boys got up, had their showers and got ready for
|
||
breakfast. It was While they were in the showers that they first noticed a
|
||
new face. He told them his name was Jeremy Woods, and that he had been sent
|
||
to the school by his father, his mother having died six months previously.
|
||
The three boys introduced themselves, and asked what school Jeremy had gone
|
||
to before. He told them that he had gone to a day school, but when his
|
||
mother had died, his work had suffered, and his father had got a tutor for
|
||
him, and arranged for him to come to St. Matthews. Jeremy gave the three
|
||
boys the impression that he did not like his tutor very much, and later on
|
||
the three boys were to find out why. The four of them went back to the
|
||
dormitory and started getting dressed. It was then that Peter noticed that
|
||
Jeremy too was wearing short trousers. He asked the boy why he had shorts
|
||
too. Jeremy sat down on the bed and told the boys his story. It was all due
|
||
to his new tutor at home. He told the boys that since he had failed his end
|
||
of term exam, his father had decided that he was to have a Tutor instead.
|
||
|
||
The following Monday Mr. Payne arrived. Jeremy had watched him from his
|
||
bedroom window. He had three big cases, he noticed, and one battered one a
|
||
bit smaller. Jeremy went back to bed and read a comic. Then there was a
|
||
knock at the door, and Barns, Jeremy's father's old butler, told him that
|
||
Mr. Payne wished to see him in his playroom.
|
||
|
||
When Jeremy walked into the room, he said hello to the new Tutor. "Hello
|
||
SIR," he corrected. Then he said, "I expected you to be wearing your best
|
||
clothes," he paused, looking the boy up and down, "instead of that
|
||
atrocious collection of rags." Jeremy explained that he had been very
|
||
surprised. He was wearing his favorite pair of jeans, admittedly rather
|
||
faded, but all the boys at his old wore jeans like that . He told Peter
|
||
that he had also been wearing a tee-shirt with "Manchester United" on it.
|
||
When Jeremy had asked if he should go and change into his Sunday clothes,
|
||
the man had told him to go and fetch them, rather than change into them. He
|
||
had gone up to his room, and taken the out of the wardrobe and run back
|
||
downstairs and showed Mr. Payne the clothes.
|
||
|
||
"Rubbish!" he said. "These are not the clothes for a child, haven't you
|
||
any knickers?"
|
||
|
||
Jeremy told the boys that he had thought they were girls underwear, and
|
||
asked the man what he meant.
|
||
|
||
"Short trousers."
|
||
|
||
"No sir!" Jeremy had said flushed. He was much too old for those!
|
||
|
||
"Then strip! If you have nothing suitable to wear, then nothing is what
|
||
you will wear until we can get some."
|
||
|
||
He could hardly believe his ears. Strip! He must be joking. But Jeremy
|
||
told the boys he soon realized he was not joking, and very slowly peeled
|
||
off his tee-shirt. Then his plimsoles and socks. Then he had undone his
|
||
jeans and also slid them off.
|
||
|
||
"And those." the man had ordered, indicating to the boy's underpants. The
|
||
boy said that he had tried to object but there was nothing to do but to
|
||
obey. He took them off and stood shyly covering his little willy with his
|
||
hands. However, he ignored the young boy's nudity. The tutor just picked up
|
||
the underpants and looked at them scornfully. "Little boys have no need for
|
||
these. You will not wear them in future. Now you will go out into the
|
||
garden and play until lunch time."
|
||
|
||
Jeremy told the three boys that he had been so amazed that he just said,
|
||
"Like this sir?"
|
||
|
||
"Like that, sir" the man had answered sarcastically.
|
||
|
||
Jeremy went on to say that he had met Barns outside the playroom door. He
|
||
looked a little surprised to see him naked, but he didn't seem to mind.
|
||
Jeremy said that he just ran out into the garden and, trying to ignore the
|
||
strange look the young gardener gave him, and the fact that any of the
|
||
neighbors might see him, ran straight to a little gap in one of the hedges
|
||
which he had made into a den.
|
||
|
||
Peter said that it must have been horrible, and Geoff and Frank echoed his
|
||
sentiments. But Jeremy went on to tell them more. He had stayed out there,
|
||
bored and ashamed, until about twelve o'clock, when he discovered he needed
|
||
to go to the toilet. He said that he came out and was just about to go out
|
||
of the back door when Mr. Payne stopped him. He tried to explain that he
|
||
had had to go to the toilet but all the man said was that he could have
|
||
gone outside, and told him to go up to the Tutor's room.
|
||
|
||
Peter asked what had happened then. Jeremy described how he had been told
|
||
to put the Tutors battered case on the bed and open it. He had been
|
||
extremely surprised and dismayed by its contents. There were canes, straps,
|
||
whips and all sorts of painful looking instruments. Jeremy told the boys
|
||
that he had occasionally been spanked at school, but had never before then
|
||
faced (if that is the right word) anything worse.
|
||
|
||
"I use the cane often and frequently," Mr. Payne said, while Jeremy just
|
||
stared into the case. "You will have to learn that, and you must also learn
|
||
never to argue. I shall cane you know. Bend over the bed."
|
||
|
||
Jeremy said that he had tried to resist. But the man was much stronger
|
||
than him, and soon had him over the foot of the bed. Twisting his arm to
|
||
force him to keep reasonably still, he gave the boy six stinging cuts with
|
||
it, which had made Jeremy cry out and yell until he was quite hoarse.
|
||
|
||
The new boy went on to explain that he had been kept naked all day, even
|
||
at the lunch table. There were no lessons -- Mr. Payne had been busy fixing
|
||
up his old playroom, and he had had to stay out of the way. At tea time,
|
||
Mr. Payne told him to report to the playroom at seven o'clock.
|
||
|
||
Jeremy said he was surprised at the difference. His toy-box was gone, and
|
||
Mr. Payne had padlocked the cupboard. A desk with a plain stool was in
|
||
place of the table, an ordinary school desk, but much wider. By now the
|
||
three boys could imagine what the reason for the width was.
|
||
|
||
Jeremy added that the table was by the window and on it the canes and
|
||
other instruments were placed. There was a blackboard in front of the desk,
|
||
and a noticeboard on the wall. The was an armchair on one side of the
|
||
blackboard, and Mr. Payne was stood beside it, stroking a long thin cane,
|
||
allowing him to examine the change.
|
||
|
||
"You are a spoiled brat," the tutor had said at last. "And it is my job to
|
||
change that. You are ignorant and lazy -- that I shall correct also. In a
|
||
few days you will have changed. You will obey every little order I give you
|
||
instantly and without thought, no matter how silly you may think it, or how
|
||
unpleasant. Now," he added, pausing, "I am going to thrash you. You will
|
||
receive twelve strokes and they will be very hard and very painful. Are you
|
||
going to take your punishment?"
|
||
|
||
Jeremy said that he had been so scared that he wanted to cry, but was
|
||
forced to mumble yes.
|
||
|
||
"Yes what?"
|
||
|
||
"Yes, sir."
|
||
|
||
"What are you going to do?"
|
||
|
||
"I am going to take my punishment."
|
||
|
||
"How many are you going to get?"
|
||
|
||
"Twelve sir." Jeremy had gulped.
|
||
|
||
"And how are they going to be?"
|
||
|
||
"Hard, sir, and very painful."
|
||
|
||
"Good. Now bend over the table."
|
||
|
||
There was a sort of clearing in the middle of the table, between the
|
||
canes. Jeremy told the three now avid listeners that he was stretched over
|
||
in this clearing. He could smell the leather of the straps and the varnish
|
||
of the canes.
|
||
|
||
The caning was terrific. Jeremy told them that he never thought he would
|
||
survive. Tears blocked his vision so that he could only see the blurred
|
||
outline of his knuckles as his hands gripped the far side of the table.
|
||
Again and again came the stinging cuts, cutting, burning his sore, hot
|
||
bottom. Jeremy said the man had concentrated on the lower half of his
|
||
buttocks and upper part of his thighs, and the three boys agreed that that
|
||
was where it was most painful.
|
||
|
||
When it had finished, Jeremy said that he had been sent to bed. Actually,
|
||
his bedtime in the holidays was nine o'clock, but he didn't want to argue.
|
||
He just went to bed and rubbed his sore bottom and cried himself to sleep.
|
||
|
||
Jeremy told the boys that the next morning, after breakfast, Mr. Payne had
|
||
gone upstairs with him (following him) and sifted through his clothes. He
|
||
had said that he could wear a white shirt, a tie, black shoes and ankle
|
||
socks, and his raincoat. Nothing else.
|
||
|
||
Their new friend explained that the white shirt was a bit too small for
|
||
him and did not cover his bottom or winkle. The raincoat only had three
|
||
buttons and the wind could easily blow it open.
|
||
|
||
That trip into town was a nightmare from beginning to end. To start off it
|
||
was a warm day, in spite of a gentle wind; the tutor didn't take his car,
|
||
but they went by bus; in the bus Jeremy told the boys that he had had to
|
||
sit on the outside of the seat and was sure everyone realized that he had
|
||
nothing on under his coat -- and very probably did, because he frantically
|
||
tried to pull the bottom of the coat down further still.
|
||
|
||
The three boys agreed with Jeremy that it must have been very
|
||
embarrassing, but he told them that it had got worse as it went on. They
|
||
didn't go immediately to the clothes shop, but stopped to get some tobacco
|
||
for Mr. Payne. Then he had to get some stationery. Then he had to go and
|
||
see someone on business and left him outside, warning him of the
|
||
consequences if he moved.
|
||
|
||
While he was standing there, looking very conspicuous in a raincoat on a
|
||
warm, sunny day, holding it down against the wind, a schoolfriend came
|
||
along. He had noticed the bare legs, and in answer to his questions, told
|
||
him about the tutor, and the fact that he had nothing on under the coat.
|
||
Unfortunately, some more boys came along, and his friend, wanting to
|
||
show-off this exciting piece of news, suddenly grabbed his coat and pulled
|
||
it up. The humiliation! All the boys rocked with laughter and Jeremy said
|
||
that he had wanted to run away as they continually tried to expose him
|
||
again. They were still jeering when Mr. Payne came out. They followed them
|
||
all the way down the street, and of course, more boys joined them.
|
||
|
||
Finally they had into a shop and Mr. Payne chose some clothes. He bought
|
||
several shirts - all short sleeved - a couple of jumpers, and about five
|
||
pairs of shorts. They took them into a cubicle and tried them on, one by
|
||
one. Mr. Payne refused to listen to his complaints about their tightness,
|
||
and merely told him to "shut up".
|
||
|
||
Jeremy told the boys about the clothes. There was a white pair, with
|
||
turnups on the leg, which were extremely short and barely covered his
|
||
bottom. A black pair were equally as tight, only they didn't have turnups,
|
||
and they were all too tight.
|
||
|
||
Mr. Payne had made him wear the white shorts with a pale blue shirt. His
|
||
white shirt and tie were wrapped up with the other clothes. He told the
|
||
boys that he had forgotten about the two stripes on his thighs, which he
|
||
had got the night before - although it would have been impossible to cover
|
||
them while carrying the parcel and overcoat. The boys were still outside
|
||
and jeered all the more when they saw how he was dressed. It was all right
|
||
for them, in their jeans, and not having to worry whether they'd be beaten
|
||
for something today.
|
||
|
||
He went on to say that the next stop was at the tailors. The tailor, who
|
||
apparently knew Mr. Payne, told them to come to a room at the back. The Mr.
|
||
Payne told him to take off his shorts and the tailor measured him, but not
|
||
just normally. He measured how deep the cleft of his bottom was, how long
|
||
his winkle was; he even told him to erect it so as to get that measurement.
|
||
Jeremy told them he was terribly embarrassed and found it difficult. But
|
||
when Mr. Payne told him that if he didn't obey instantly he'd whip him, he
|
||
managed. Mr. Payne didn't give the tailor any instructions, but just left.
|
||
The clothes he made arrived about a week later.
|
||
|
||
He told the boys that they had then gone home for lunch. On the bus, as
|
||
they were getting off, Mr. Payne was going first and didn't see a man
|
||
suddenly put his hand out and feel the front of his shorts. And that,
|
||
Jeremy explained, was how he came to be wearing shorts. He told the boys
|
||
about the shorts that the tailor had made.
|
||
|
||
The tailor had made six pairs of each type. Mr. Payne had made him put on
|
||
one pair of each type to see how they looked. The first type were quite
|
||
ordinary when seen from the front, just grey worsted school short trousers:
|
||
but in the back were two triangular tears, not very big, but enough to see
|
||
that his bottom was bruised. The tailor had made the tears appear quite
|
||
natural - these Mr. Payne told him, he would wear in public if he
|
||
misbehaved.
|
||
|
||
The second pair had a large square cut out of the back. The third pair had
|
||
no middle seam. They were connected at the waist, but there was no fly or
|
||
anything from the front to under the legs to the belt at the back. Jeremy
|
||
told the three friends that Mr. Payne was pleased with these, since when he
|
||
tried to hold the front together, the back came open, showing his bare
|
||
bottom, and if he held that, his winkle was exposed.
|
||
|
||
Another pair had a zip at the side, and a small hole which his willy
|
||
and/or balls could be pulled through. With both out, it was painful,
|
||
sitting down, since they pulled his balls.
|
||
|
||
Another pair had a large hole in the front. The next pair were pretty much
|
||
normal, albeit, very brief. These, Jeremy said, he was only allowed to wear
|
||
if he proved worthy of them. The final pair also looked quite ordinary and
|
||
were a good fit. These were for school and social occasions. The only
|
||
difference was that these had a rubber tube, quite thick, sewn into the
|
||
seam level with his bottom hole. He went to the locker and pulled them out.
|
||
The boys looked at them and asked why the tube was there. Jeremy explained
|
||
that to try these shorts on, Mr. Payne put some cream onto the rubber and
|
||
then pulled them on, guiding the tube with his hand. He pushed it a little
|
||
way in, which hurt a lot, and then from the outside of the shorts, pushed
|
||
it right in, which hurt like murder.
|
||
|
||
He buttoned them up, and then told him to sit down and stay there for a
|
||
while. Soon, Jeremy said, he more or less got used to it - though he could
|
||
never forget it was there - but if he moved, even slightly, the pain was
|
||
tremendous. He told Mr. Payne as much, but he had told him to stop whining,
|
||
and said that Jeremy'd would get used to it eventually. Jeremy had to admit
|
||
that he did in fact enjoy wearing them now, that was why he had sneaked
|
||
them out and had brought them with him.
|
||
|
||
Peter asked if he just got the cane from the man, but Jeremy said he got
|
||
strapped and worse, and not just by his tutor. One day, Mr. Payne had taken
|
||
him with him when he visited a friend. They had gone in his car, but he had
|
||
been very uncomfortable because he had the neat shorts on, the ones with
|
||
the rubber thing in, and he hadn't got used to them yet. Each time they had
|
||
over a bump, Jeremy explained, he had felt it more than Mr. Payne: once he
|
||
deliberately went over a hole which made him cry aloud.
|
||
|
||
Mr. Payne's friend, whom he had had to call uncle, looked very nice, but
|
||
in fact he had soon found out that he was just as strict as Mr. Payne.
|
||
|
||
While the two men were having cocktails he had had to show uncle his
|
||
various shorts. Mr. Payne had brought them along in his battered case.
|
||
Uncle was very interested with the shorts with the plug in, and examined
|
||
them carefully. Jeremy said that he had to put each pair of shorts on in
|
||
turn, and as he was changing Uncle remarked to Mr. Payne that his bottom
|
||
was unmarked.
|
||
|
||
Jeremy explained to the boys that every so often Mr. Payne gave him a
|
||
weeks holiday from beatings. During that time, all his offences are marked
|
||
in a book, and he would be punished for them the next week. Jeremy said
|
||
that Mr. Payne said that otherwise his bottom would become insensitive. The
|
||
three friends knew for a fact that beatings always seemed more painful
|
||
after a period of not having any.
|
||
|
||
The last pair of shorts Jeremy had had to put on, he told the boys, were
|
||
the shorts without the seam. They were fairly loose so he could arrange
|
||
then so that they hid everything, but then he explained, he would have to
|
||
move for something, and never knew which side to cover.
|
||
|
||
Jeremy became quiet, and Peter asked him what was the matter. The boy said
|
||
that during the lunch, he had knocked over a glass of water.
|
||
|
||
After a short silence, Mr. Payne had turned to Uncle, and said that, since
|
||
it was his table cloth he ruined, perhaps you would like to deal with him.
|
||
He's got a nice fresh bottom: let's see what you can do with it."
|
||
|
||
Jeremy said that he was told to put on the shorts with the square cut out
|
||
of the bottom and then made to stand in the corner until they had finished
|
||
lunch. He said he felt so humiliated. He said he was still standing there,
|
||
not bare, although his bottom was, which made it worse somehow, as the
|
||
footman cleared the table. Jeremy said he didn't know whether he took any
|
||
notice of him or not.
|
||
|
||
Jeremy explained that it was a large room, with the table at one end of
|
||
the room and a suite of furniture at the other. When the footman had
|
||
finished, Uncle called the boy over to him.
|
||
|
||
The man said that he would start off with a simple spanking, and put his
|
||
hand on the boy's flies. He undid them one by one, allowing the shorts to
|
||
fall to Jeremy's knees. Carefully he arranged the boy over his knees - he
|
||
was sitting in the middle of the couch - with the boy's head in the
|
||
cushions.
|
||
|
||
Jeremy said he did not feel afraid of him. He seemed much more affable
|
||
than Mr. Payne. He said he felt reassured when the spanking started: He
|
||
could hardly feel it. But then it started getting worse. The spanks got
|
||
harder and harder as he went on, each spank being slightly harder than the
|
||
previous one. At first it was only a warm tingling. Then a pleasant
|
||
stinging. Then each individual slap started stinging, and Uncle didn't give
|
||
him time to recover after each slap.
|
||
|
||
Jeremy added that soon he was wriggling in agony and Uncle had to twist
|
||
his arm to stop him from involuntary resistance - Jeremy said that he knew
|
||
it would be worse for me if he resisted, but he just couldn't help it.
|
||
|
||
Jeremy said that after a while, Uncle finally let him struggle up. He said
|
||
his bottom felt like it was on fire, and had gone to rub it, but Uncle
|
||
stopped him. "Go to the bottom drawer of that chest of drawers," he said,
|
||
pointing, "and open it." Jeremy had opened the drawer. Like Mr. Payne's
|
||
battered suitcase, it was full of canes and straps.
|
||
|
||
"Take out the cane with the ivory handle and bring it to me." The cane he
|
||
mentioned was shorter than the one Mr. Payne usually used: but it was just
|
||
as "swishy". Jeremy took it to him. Again he put him over his knees, and
|
||
again the beating started very gently, but increased in pain as the time
|
||
went on. He gave quick little flicks, one immediately after the other,
|
||
covering the entire area of his bottom, even the top halves of his
|
||
buttocks.
|
||
|
||
Then, Jeremy said, he stopped and told him to kick off his shorts (Jeremy
|
||
explained that when he had fetched the cane, he had managed to keep the
|
||
shorts at his knees), and Uncle moved one leg off his knee, so that they
|
||
were now wide apart. Holding him firmly, he gave Jeremy a half a dozen cuts
|
||
on the insides of his buttocks, where the flesh is really tender, and each
|
||
one made the boy really scream. It really is the most tender part of the
|
||
body.
|
||
|
||
He then had Jeremy stand up and fetch him a leather paddle from the
|
||
drawer. The boy was told to clear the dining table and sit up on the edge
|
||
of it. When he had done so, Uncle lifted the boy's legs high over his head,
|
||
forcing the boy to lay back on the table. Jeremy said he was then told to
|
||
hold his legs apart, forcing his legs wide open, and that if he let go it
|
||
would cost him an extra six strokes.
|
||
|
||
In this position Jeremy said that he was completely defenseless. Peter and
|
||
Frank just stared at each other. They knew just how defenseless someone was
|
||
in that position. Jeremy went on to say that with his legs up in the air,
|
||
his bottom, balls and hole were all exposed. Uncle swung his arm back.
|
||
|
||
The first one was right on the center of his bottom and hurt so much that
|
||
he had almost let go of his legs. The second was a bit lower: The third a
|
||
little higher than the first. The next six were all centered around that
|
||
spot and with each blow the temptation to let go of his legs was stronger
|
||
and stronger.
|
||
|
||
Then Uncle started aiming higher, so that he was hitting Jeremy where his
|
||
thighs joined his bottom. The tenth and eleventh strokes were right on the
|
||
"crease" but the twelfth and last landed right on his balls. Jeremy
|
||
confided to the boys that he let out a terrific shriek, and clutched at his
|
||
sore balls frantically. Uncle waited until he had sufficiently
|
||
recovered,and said, "You will now have the extra six for letting go of your
|
||
legs."
|
||
|
||
"Oh but sir, you hit--"
|
||
|
||
"Silence!"
|
||
|
||
Jeremy was made to hold onto his ankles again and Uncle had walked over to
|
||
the drawer. He returned with a thin leather strap that was split near the
|
||
end into six very thin strands, each one knotted at the end. It looked
|
||
terrifying.
|
||
|
||
Jeremy described how Uncle had stroked his sore bottom with it for a few
|
||
minutes, particularly putting it between his buttocks and drawing it
|
||
upwards, over his hole. It tickled and hurt at the same time, somehow. Then
|
||
suddenly he drew back the whip and flicked it across Jeremy's bottom. Not
|
||
hard, but it hurt far more than the paddle. The little knots rubbed right
|
||
across his bottom, as though scratching it. Two more followed, just as
|
||
painful. The fourth however landed right on the boy's hole, the knots
|
||
seeming to tear it to pieces.
|
||
|
||
Jeremy had clung onto his ankles until his knuckles were white: but could
|
||
not stop screaming. The fifth landed on exactly the same spot.
|
||
|
||
"You have one more to come," said Uncle, and Jeremy said he could feel the
|
||
man tickling his balls with the ends of the whip and guessed where it would
|
||
come. Jeremy also said that Uncle threatened that if he let go of his legs
|
||
this time, then he would get twelve more, so he clenched his teeth and
|
||
steeled himself. and clutched his ankles so tight that his wrists had ached
|
||
for hours afterwards.
|
||
|
||
SWISH!!!
|
||
|
||
Jeremy said at that he had screamed, and almost fell of the table -- but
|
||
fortunately he didn't let go of his ankles. The pain was tremendous, and
|
||
lasted for days afterwards. His little ball-bag, apart from being bruised
|
||
(and later a little swollen) was covered with little scratches.
|
||
|
||
Uncle finally told him he could get up and rub himself, Both men had sat
|
||
there and watched, grinning as he had tried to soothe both sides of his
|
||
body at once.
|
||
|
||
Peter asked how long the whole thing had lasted. Jeremy said the whole
|
||
punishment had lasted over an hour. Then they had gone home.
|
||
|
||
The three boys reassured the boy that they didn't whip or flog at the
|
||
school, it was mainly caning and spanking, and as he was in short trousers,
|
||
he would probably have his bottom smacked more than caned. Peter asked if
|
||
he could try on the shorts with the plug in. Jeremy said that he had
|
||
sneaked all six pairs of them out, and offered a pair to each boy. At that
|
||
point, he didn't understand why the boys were so eager to wear them, he
|
||
himself had hated them at first. But when he asked the boys why, they just
|
||
said that it reminded them of something, and that if he liked, they would
|
||
show him sometime. The boys quickly slipped of their own short trousers and
|
||
Y-fronts and eagerly helped each other put on the shorts Jeremy gave them.
|
||
They were right, it did feel just like someone had their winkle up them,
|
||
and by pushing on the back seam, it almost felt like having it thrust in
|
||
and out of them. The one thing the boys did notice though, was that they
|
||
were very tight, with no room at all to get a hand up the leg: but they
|
||
were very short, and the boys surprised Jeremy by pulling each others'
|
||
willies out from the leg. He was even more amazed, and a little scared when
|
||
Peter reached over and pulled his out as well. He had never had sex in any
|
||
way with another boy, but he felt as if he had been accepted into the
|
||
school, and he made up his mind that anything his new friends did with or
|
||
to him was all right with him. After a couple of quick, sly rubs, the boys
|
||
quickly adjusted their clothing and all went down to breakfast.
|
||
CHAPTER TWENTY-EIGHT
|
||
|
||
Trouble was brewing. Bill Marsh had come up to Peter on a couple of
|
||
occasions. Nothing much was really said, except for the occasional Cub
|
||
Scout salute and the odd "Dib Dib Dib" or two, but Peter knew that there
|
||
was something being planned. Steven Evans had not returned to the school,
|
||
his parents had moved to Yorkshire during the holidays, and he had gone to
|
||
a new school in Kettering: Peter wished Marsh had gone too, but no-one was
|
||
ever that lucky.
|
||
|
||
He had seen little of Raymond since they had returned to school. The older
|
||
boy was involved in serious study for his Common Entrance Examination. He
|
||
wanted to get into Oxford, and he would need a very high pass mark to
|
||
qualify. He had spent one Saturday afternoon with the three boys and their
|
||
new friend, Jeremy. Jeremy got on well with Raymond straight off. Ray had
|
||
asked Peter if the new boy had been initiated yet. Peter said no, but they
|
||
were working on it. He told the older boy about Jeremy's home life, and
|
||
Raymond admitted that they ought to take it slowly. He suggested one
|
||
possibility would be the next day at the ducker, which was a pond at the
|
||
far side of the school where some of the boys went swimming. Peter saw at
|
||
once what the prefect was getting at, and asked if the older boy would be
|
||
there too. Raymond said he didn't know, but he would get there if at all
|
||
possible. Peter had told Raymond about the shorts all four boys were now
|
||
wearing, and the older boy had had a good look at them at the time, and now
|
||
when ever he saw one of the boys, he gave them a pat on their backside,
|
||
just to remind them that the rubber bung was still there. Peter had an idea
|
||
that if Jeremy liked the feel of the bung up his bottom, it should not be
|
||
to difficult to get him to accept a substitute. How he hoped so. He wanted
|
||
to be the first to welcome the new boy to their friendly little group
|
||
|
||
Throughout the afternoon, Jeremy had noticed that the four other boys were
|
||
more than a little familiar with each other, quite often he had noticed a
|
||
hand brush against the front of another's shorts, occasionally giving a
|
||
little squeeze to the bulge that was rather prominent in the tight fitting
|
||
grey shorts he had given them. He felt a little left out, not because he
|
||
didn't understand it, but because although everyone was friendly to him, he
|
||
was still a bit of an outsider. The only time anyone had touched him was
|
||
that first day they had all met, and he found himself wanting more,
|
||
although he wasn't quite sure what more would be.
|
||
|
||
The next day, after breakfast, Peter sought out Jeremy and asked him if he
|
||
wanted to go for a swim in the ducker. Jeremy said he didn't mind, and
|
||
asked what he should take with him. Peter told him he could bring his
|
||
swimming trunks and a towel if he liked, but mostly, they just took their
|
||
towels, 'cos after all, it was only boys there. Peter could see by the look
|
||
in the other boy's eyes that he was not too keen on nakedness, perhaps
|
||
because of what had happened the first day he had met his tutor. Peter
|
||
could see that they would all have to work on the boy to get him to accept
|
||
the fact that nudity was not only natural, but could also be great fun!
|
||
|
||
When everyone was ready, the four boys walked down to the ducker, towels
|
||
thrown over their shoulders. They got to the lake, and Peter noticed that
|
||
there was no one else about. He had not gone past the notice-board that
|
||
morning, so he had not seen the note that Raymond had posted there the
|
||
previous evening. It had read:
|
||
|
||
THE DUCKER IS OUT OF BOUNDS DUE
|
||
|
||
TO CLEANING OF THE POND UNTIL
|
||
|
||
FURTHER NOTICE
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
This had had the effect of clearing the pond, so that the boys would have
|
||
a good opportunity to initiate Jeremy.
|
||
|
||
The boys quickly stripped of their Sunday suits and Peter Frank and Geoff
|
||
all jumped into the pond stark naked. Jeremy had had his swimming trunks on
|
||
underneath his shorts, and he kept them on as he entered the water. The
|
||
three friends were a little disappointed, but they would find some way of
|
||
getting them of him, and the sooner the better.
|
||
|
||
In fact it was Raymond who provided them with the answer. He had been sat
|
||
inside the old Pavilion, waiting for the boys to come down for their swim.
|
||
When he had seen his three friends dive in stripped, and Jeremy with his
|
||
trunks on, he knew something would have to be done. He decided that he
|
||
could put his notice to good use after all, albeit in a different fashion
|
||
to the one he had had in mind. He stood up, and strode down to the waters'
|
||
edge.
|
||
|
||
He called to the boys to get out of the water, and demanded to know what
|
||
they were doing there. When the boys glibly shouted swimming, he asked them
|
||
if they had looked at the notice board. When the boys admitted they had
|
||
not, he told them about the note. He also said that even though he was
|
||
their friend, he was also a prefect, and as such, responsible for keeping
|
||
discipline in the school. He told them that he would give them the option
|
||
of being reported to the Headmaster, or being dealt with by him.
|
||
Immediately The three friends saw what was happening. They instantly
|
||
feigned horror, begging Raymond not to report them to the head, making it
|
||
sound like the worst of all possible threats, and as hoped, Jeremy joined
|
||
them in their plea. Raymond didn't let them off the hook instantly though,
|
||
he said that he didn't know, he really ought to report them, but the boys
|
||
continued their pleading, and the prefect pretended to weaken, and said
|
||
that he would deal with them, rather than get them into even more trouble.
|
||
He told all four boys to collect their clothes and go up to the pavilion.
|
||
|
||
Once inside he took hold of Peter, and unceremoniously bent him over his
|
||
knee and gave him ten hearty spanks on his bare bottom. Peter, playing up
|
||
to the line, struggled fiercely, as did Geoff when next it was his turn.
|
||
Jeremy, who unknown to him was being left to last, could hardly believe his
|
||
eyes when Frank actually started crying during his punishment. So it was
|
||
almost with pride that he walked over to Raymond when it was his turn. He
|
||
didn't even object when the prefect took down his trunks and laid him
|
||
across his knee. This was old hat for him. He took his ten without a
|
||
murmur, and lined up with the other three when it was finished. He expected
|
||
some sort of lecture from the prefect when he had finished, but once all
|
||
four boys were lined up next to each other, Raymond just stood up and
|
||
walked out, closing the door behind him.
|
||
|
||
Once the door closed, Peter looked over at Jeremy, He hoped that they
|
||
hadn't laid it on too thick, he didn't want the new boy thinking they were
|
||
all cry-babies. He went over to the boy and shook his hand, saying how
|
||
brave he was. Frank and Geoff also crowded round him, and started rubbing
|
||
his bottom. It was having the desired effect, Peter noticed, as the new
|
||
boy's willy started rising upwards, hardening as it went. The other three
|
||
were all ready stiff as logs, and Peter grabbed hold of Jeremy's and rubbed
|
||
it, encouraging it to stiffen. He took hold of Jeremy's right hand and
|
||
placed it on his winkle, encouraging the boy to do the same to him. The boy
|
||
seemed quite willing to follow Peter's example, after all this he supposed
|
||
was what he had been waiting for.
|
||
|
||
It was then that he felt something pressing against his bum hole. Someone
|
||
was behind him, pushing something up his bottom. It wasn't until he felt
|
||
himself being pushed forward, to bend over that he saw what it was. Frank
|
||
had pushed his finger up into his hole. It felt a bit like the plug in his
|
||
shorts, only different, as this was probing and bending, and pressing into
|
||
him.
|
||
|
||
He felt, rather than saw Geoff take over from Peter, who now walked round
|
||
behind him. He noticed as he passed that the boy's winkle was a bit bigger
|
||
than his own, and it looked all glisteny. He had not noticed the boy's
|
||
pre-cum slowly trickling out the end of it, as he had had hold further down
|
||
the shaft.
|
||
|
||
He felt the finger being withdrawn, and then inserted again. Only this
|
||
time it felt bigger. He looked backwards between his legs just in time to
|
||
see Peter thrust his willy up into his bottom. Jeremy could not believe it.
|
||
He had never imagined anything like it, another boy wanting to put his
|
||
winkle up his bum. It sent him into wild spasms of joy as Geoff now slid
|
||
under the boy, and sitting cross legged between his legs, took the boy deep
|
||
into his throat, sucking for all his worth on the new boy's shaft.
|
||
|
||
Jeremy could hardly have conceived that this was what he had been aching
|
||
for, the past two weeks since he had met the three boys. He was so high on
|
||
the atmosphere of the occasion that he offered no resistance at all as
|
||
Frank pushed his willy against the boys lips. They parted to allow entrance
|
||
for the throbbing member into his hot, receptive mouth, and he imitated as
|
||
best he could, what the boy below him was doing to his own, tingling willy,
|
||
sucking against it, dragging it further and further into his mouth until
|
||
his lips were hard against the boy's body and balls.
|
||
|
||
His mind was screaming with the undeniable pleasure that he was obtaining
|
||
from the multiple assaults on his body and senses. He felt one pair of arms
|
||
around his stomach, another around his legs, and two firm hands upon his
|
||
head as the three friends worked on his body, two pumping into him, and one
|
||
draining from him. He reached down and felt around him until his hand came
|
||
into contact with Geoff's cock, and he wanked the other boy. The twin
|
||
gushings of boy-cum entering his bottom and mouth, almost simultaneously,
|
||
triggered his own juices as he shot jet after jet down Geoff's throat,
|
||
which in turn set Geoff off.
|
||
|
||
All four boys were so intent on their pursuits that none of them noticed
|
||
the happy, smiling face of Raymond, as he surveyed the scene through the
|
||
window. He turned away, and with a light step, walked back across the
|
||
playing fields to the main school building, pleased to have been a part of
|
||
the forming of a new, and happy friendship. He knew that the boys would
|
||
probably spend most of the rest of the day back there, alternately
|
||
swimming, playing, and probably pairing off or as a group, to enjoy happy
|
||
and natural sex together, unburdened by clothing and inhibitions. He would
|
||
have liked to have joined them, but unfortunately he had to study, if had
|
||
was to stand any chance of going to university. And anyway, there would now
|
||
be many more days for the five of them to get together!.
|
||
|
||
CHAPTER TWENTY-NINE
|
||
|
||
About two weeks had passed since the afternoon at the Ducker. Jeremy was
|
||
now much more part of the group than he had been when the boys had first
|
||
met him. He felt far more at ease, and if the truth be told, was turning
|
||
out to be far more adventurous than the other three. He had asked Peter if
|
||
he could borrow a pair of his looser grey short trousers, and he now wore
|
||
these quite frequently, often practically inviting a grope at the back of
|
||
the classroom from either Peter, who now sat next to him, or from Geoff or
|
||
Frank whenever the opportunity arose. He would also on occasions play up to
|
||
Raymond when he was around, often being rewarded by a sharp slap on the
|
||
seat of his trousers for doing so.
|
||
|
||
Peter also lent him one of his Short trousered Sunday suits to wear, and
|
||
the four boys would often go out for walks on Sunday afternoons, and find a
|
||
quiet place and feel each other up. They had not as yet had a further
|
||
opportunity for more serious sex, but to fill in the time, one or other of
|
||
the boys would occasionally slip a finger up inside one of his chums in the
|
||
showers, just to let them know that he was still thinking of them.
|
||
|
||
One particular Sunday afternoon, the four boys decided that it might be an
|
||
idea to catch a bus into the town, and see what was going on. They all met
|
||
at the school gates, and headed of to the bus-stop. As they had a little
|
||
time to wait until the bus came along, all four of them slipped into the
|
||
public toilet, and had a little grope. They were so engrossed in this
|
||
occupation that they almost missed the bus, but luckily it was just pulling
|
||
into the stop as they emerged from the toilet.
|
||
|
||
When they arrived at the town, most of the shops were closed, so they went
|
||
for a walk around the Sunday Market. It was there they saw a joke stall
|
||
selling novelties and such. One of the items on sale was a Charlie Chaplin
|
||
set, complete with cardboard bowler hat, fake moustache and walking stick.
|
||
Instantly Jeremy walked up, and without a second glance, bought one. The
|
||
boys were a little puzzled, as the stall-owner wrapped the thing up in a
|
||
large plastic bag and took Jeremy's money. As they walked away from the
|
||
stall, Frank asked the boy why he had bought such a silly thing.
|
||
|
||
Jeremy opened the bag, and broke the seal on the wrapping. He ignored the
|
||
hat and moustache, and pulled out the walking stick. For the first time the
|
||
boys could plainly see it. It was in fact a thin, whippy bamboo cane, about
|
||
three feet long, with a large curved handle. Jeremy led them out of the
|
||
market and over to the public conveniences where he could show them more
|
||
openly.
|
||
|
||
When they were inside he drew the cane out of the bag, and flexed it. He
|
||
told them that Mr. Payne had one just like it, only he had cut off about a
|
||
foot from the end, to make a nice little punishment cane. He took out a
|
||
penknife and quickly cut off about twelve or thirteen inches of bamboo at
|
||
the end and then swished it through the air. It did indeed sound just like
|
||
a real cane. Frank asked if it would hurt much. Jeremy told him that it
|
||
didn't cut very much, just gave a nice stinging feeling. Frank looked
|
||
doubtful.
|
||
|
||
Jeremy told him that if he didn't believe him, why not try it? Frank said
|
||
that he didn't like that idea much, but Jeremy quickly told him that he
|
||
meant on him, that Frank should use it on his bottom. Frank still wasn't
|
||
too sure, but Geoff said he would do it, but wasn't it a bit risky in a
|
||
place like this? Jeremy said that it didn't make too much noise, and in any
|
||
case, someone could be lookout at the door, to warn them if anyone was
|
||
coming.
|
||
|
||
Frank said he would be lookout, and walked over to the entrance.
|
||
Immediately, Jeremy bent over, flipping up his jacket go give Geoff a clear
|
||
shot at his bottom. Geoff raised his arm, and brought the cane swishing
|
||
down onto Jeremy's bottom.
|
||
|
||
WHACKK!
|
||
|
||
Jeremy flinched a little, but apart from that showed no signs of
|
||
discomfort. He told Geoff to give him six, and then they could see what
|
||
marks he might have. Geoff thought that perhaps he hadn't laid it on right,
|
||
and so relined his aim, and dealt the other five blows on Jeremy's suit
|
||
shorts.
|
||
|
||
When he had finished, Jeremy unfastened his snake-belt, undid the fly
|
||
buttons on his shorts and lowered them to the ground. Geoff had forgotten
|
||
that Jeremy very rarely, if ever, wore underpants, and he was quite
|
||
surprised that the boy had taken the cane so well. There were indeed six
|
||
faint red stripes on the boy's bottom, not very straight or even, but there
|
||
again, Geoff had never really caned anyone before, and so was not exactly
|
||
an expert. Peter asked if it had hurt much. Jeremy told him that it stung a
|
||
bit at first, but it didn't last long. Peter asked if he could have a try.
|
||
Jeremy said o.k, and would he like him to do it. When Peter agreed, Jeremy
|
||
quickly refastened his shorts and took the cane from Geoff. He made Peter
|
||
bend over, and flipped his jacket over his head. He gave Peter six quick
|
||
cuts, but being more experienced, knew just how and where to land them.
|
||
Peter yelped at each cut, and by the sixth was looking decidedly red-faced.
|
||
Jeremy reached round and undid Peter's short trousers, allowing them to
|
||
drop to his knees. This time the stripes were evenly spread across both
|
||
cheeks, and absolutely parallel. Peter had had Y-fronts on, but even so,
|
||
his marks were more pronounced. Geoff asked why there was such a
|
||
difference. Jeremy explained that he had had a caning almost every day
|
||
during the holidays, and somehow you sort of got used to it, whereas Peter
|
||
had only mainly been spanked recently. By now, Frank was more reassured,
|
||
and called over from the door, asking if Peter might give him six, just to
|
||
see what it felt like. He too, when examined, had more pronounced marks,
|
||
and so did Geoff, when he received his six from Frank. However they all
|
||
agreed that it didn't hurt that much, and in fact it left them all with a
|
||
nice, warm feeling in their behinds as they made their way back to school
|
||
that afternoon. Jeremy threw the rest of the kit in a bin by the side of
|
||
the road, but kept hold of the cane, which he hooked over the back of his
|
||
shoulder, under his jacket, and slipped down the back of his shorts, so
|
||
that no one would see it.
|
||
|
||
When they got back to school, they all went up to their dorm, which was
|
||
luckily quite empty, and Jeremy hid the cane in the back of his locker. All
|
||
four boys had decided on the way back that at the first opportunity, they
|
||
would show it to Raymond. Perhaps he could think of further uses for it. As
|
||
long as they could get in on the action. All four of them were pretty
|
||
certain they would!
|
||
|
||
The next time they saw Raymond they took him up to their dorm. There was a
|
||
couple of other boys in the room when they got there, but as soon as they
|
||
saw the prefect they quickly left the room. Jeremy took the cane out of his
|
||
locker and showed it to the senior boy. He made a great show of examining
|
||
it, swishing it through the air a few times, and he finally announced that
|
||
he liked it. Peter asked him what he might use it for.
|
||
|
||
Raymond told the boys that it wasn't much use as a punishment cane, but he
|
||
might use it on the first formers, as it looked worse than it would hurt,
|
||
but it would be enough to frighten some of the younger boys. And of course
|
||
it could be used to keep little boys who wore short trousers in their
|
||
place, swishing it down on Jeremy's shorts as he said it. Jeremy leapt
|
||
forward, not because it had hurt, but because he had the shorts with the
|
||
bung on, and the end of the cane had hit the bottom of it, forcing further
|
||
up his bottom. It didn't hurt as much as it had used to since he had been
|
||
initiated into the group, but a boy was still aware that it was there, all
|
||
the same.
|
||
|
||
Raymond asked Peter what they had done with the uniforms he had given them
|
||
during the holidays. The young boy replied that they had taken them home
|
||
with them, but as there was no place to hide them at home, they had brought
|
||
them back to school with them, and hidden them in their lockers.
|
||
|
||
Jeremy felt a little left out. He didn't know what the boys were talking
|
||
about, and he was intrigued to know what they were referring to.
|
||
|
||
Peter asked Raymond why he had asked. In reply, the older boy reached
|
||
inside his blazer and took out an envelope. Raymond told him that one of
|
||
his duties was to deliver the mail to the boys, and he had come across this
|
||
one that morning. He handed it to Peter. It was addressed to Bill Marsh,
|
||
but the handwriting on the envelope looked familiar too. Then Peter
|
||
realized that it was Steven Evans' handwriting. He quickly opened the
|
||
envelope and took out the contents. There were three sheets of notepaper,
|
||
and wrapped inside them were six photographs! Peter knew even before he
|
||
turned them over what they were. As he turned them the right way up he saw
|
||
that his guess was right. They were the photographs of them in their cub
|
||
uniforms. He quickly looked through them and asked Raymond if he had seen
|
||
them. The prefect said no, but he too had recognized the handwriting, and
|
||
taken the envelope, as he had guessed what was inside. Peter handed the
|
||
pictures to Raymond to look at. Jeremy saw them too, as he was stood next
|
||
to the older boy. He didn't realize what they were for a moment, and then
|
||
he recognized the people in the photographs. He asked when they had been
|
||
taken.
|
||
|
||
Frank, who had come into the room, and had caught a glimpse of the snaps,
|
||
told Jeremy what had happened during the half term. As he told the tale, he
|
||
could see that Jeremy was getting turned on by the whole idea. Peter picked
|
||
up on it too, and while Frank told the boy about what had happened during
|
||
the hols, he slipped around the side of Jeremy's locker and made his way to
|
||
his own bed space.
|
||
|
||
Frank registered no surprise as he saw Peter return. He carried on telling
|
||
the boy what they had done, and what had happened. When he had finished,
|
||
Jeremy said that he would have loved to have seen them in their little cub
|
||
scout uniforms, and turned to Raymond. You could not imagine the surprise
|
||
on his face when he saw Peter. The boy had slipped back to his locker, and
|
||
quickly changed into his cub uniform. Frank moved over to the door, and
|
||
wedged a chair under the handle.
|
||
|
||
Peter asked Jeremy what he thought. Jeremy went over to Peter for a better
|
||
look. He thought the uniform made Peter look a lot younger, maybe about
|
||
nine or ten, and he wished that he were alone with him. He had recently
|
||
started having dreams where he was alone with one of the first year boys,
|
||
and he had made the younger boy do all sorts of sexy things. He hadn't got
|
||
any further than dreaming about it, basically because he was a little
|
||
scared that if he tried it for real, he might get into trouble. But here
|
||
was a real opportunity to try out all the things he had been thinking
|
||
about. Peter looked like a little boy, and perhaps he could talk him into
|
||
playing one as well, and go along with his new fantasies. He ran his hand
|
||
over the cub jersey, not stopping when he got to the bottom, but continuing
|
||
the motion down over his friends grey shorts, over his willy and down onto
|
||
his thighs. Yes, he decided, Peter would do very well, if he would go along
|
||
with it.
|
||
|
||
Raymond glanced at his watch. He told Peter that he had better change
|
||
back, as break was nearly over. He told the boys that he would keep hold of
|
||
the pictures, as it would be safer than if they were found with them. The
|
||
boys agreed, and when Peter had put his school uniform back on, they
|
||
removed the chair from the door, and went back down to the quadrangle, just
|
||
in time for the bell.
|
||
CHAPTER THIRTY
|
||
|
||
It was coming up to the school's Open Day. All the boys were busy working
|
||
on their display projects. The four boys had got their head together and
|
||
decided that they would do a display on the history of the school. The boys
|
||
had got a load of old yearbooks from their Form Master, and had also got a
|
||
lot of information from the local library. They spent hours drawing
|
||
diagrams and pictures, showing the development of the school since it had
|
||
been built. The boys got a great deal of enjoyment from searching through
|
||
the old yearbooks, and discovered an interesting fact. Up until eight years
|
||
previously, all boys up until the fifth form had worn short trousers.
|
||
|
||
There were numerous pictures of young boys with bare knees, and one in
|
||
particular surprised them. It was a photograph from a year book that was
|
||
about fifteen years old, and sat right at one end of the third form
|
||
photograph was their own House Master, Mr. Walters. He looked quite a
|
||
scruffy little boy, with his hair in a mess, and his socks down around his
|
||
ankles. The boys decided that that was one picture that would definitely
|
||
have to go onto their display!
|
||
|
||
The boys enjoyed the project for another reason as well. Their choice of
|
||
topic meant that they were allowed to go up into the old attic, outside of
|
||
lessons, where a lot of the old books and photographs were kept. Needless
|
||
to say it did not take long, once up there, for the boys to end up stripped
|
||
off (Their excuse being it stopped their uniforms getting dusty) and
|
||
rummaging around the old cupboards. Jeremy had been the first to point out
|
||
the other opportunities. He had sneaked the cane out of his locker, and
|
||
finding Geoff leaning over an old trunk, trying to reach some old books,
|
||
caught him a stinger across the bottom. Geoff had jumped up, but not quick
|
||
enough. Jeremy had already begun to swing again, but Geoff's moving only
|
||
served to put the other boy off his aim, and he caught Geoff a cracker,
|
||
right across the backs of his thighs. Almost instantly, a thin red line
|
||
arose on his legs.
|
||
|
||
Jeremy apologized profusely to his friend, but Geoff had other ideas. He
|
||
snatched the cane from Jeremy, and pushed him down over the trunk. He dealt
|
||
the boy six quick, sound cuts, the last one also placed on his upper thigh.
|
||
Geoff could not understand why the boy was grinning at him as he stood up,
|
||
but then he noticed the state of his friend's willy. The caning had got him
|
||
randy. Jeremy took the cane from his friend, and grabbed hold of his cock.
|
||
He quickly pushed the other boy down on the floor, and still holding
|
||
Geoff's willy, straddled the boy, his willy brushing against his lips.
|
||
|
||
Geoff opened his mouth, and using his hand to guide the boy in, started to
|
||
lick on Jeremy's winkle as the boy on top slowly started to fuck his mouth.
|
||
All the time, Jeremy was pumping on his friend's willy, until it felt so
|
||
hard that it was like iron, and he leant forwards and started gobbling it,
|
||
taking it right into his mouth, dribbling saliva over Geoff's hairless
|
||
balls.
|
||
|
||
They were so engrossed in their antics, that they were not at first aware
|
||
of a newcomer in the loft. They continued to suck each other until Jeremy
|
||
heard a rustle as the person sat down on the chest. He looked up, and was
|
||
horrified to see Mr. Walters, sat there, just watching them. He tried to
|
||
jump up, but the man just told him to carry on. Jeremy found it very
|
||
difficult, with the man sat opposite, and almost instantly, his willy
|
||
became soft. The two boys stood up, facing the House Master. He asked the
|
||
boys what they thought they were doing up in the attic. Jeremy mumbled
|
||
something about their being allowed up there, for their project. The master
|
||
told them to come over to him.
|
||
|
||
When they were in front of him, Mr. Walters spread his legs, and patted
|
||
his thighs, indicating that the boys should sit on his lap. They did so,
|
||
and he put an arm around each of them, reaching round until he took hold of
|
||
their now soft winkles. The boys were amazed. They had thought they were
|
||
going to get into all sorts of trouble, but their Form Master didn't seem
|
||
in the least bit angry. He just asked them what they had been doing when he
|
||
came up into the loft. The boys became very shy, and neither of them
|
||
answered. Mr. Walters asked them again, and finally Geoff said "Sucking,
|
||
sir" in a very quiet voice.
|
||
|
||
The master turned to face Jeremy and asked them if they had done it
|
||
before. Jeremy still felt very shy of the man, and just nodded his head. He
|
||
looked down into his lap and saw that the teacher was slowly stroking his
|
||
winkle, making it hard again. Mr. Walters went on talking to him, saying
|
||
didn't he know that it was naughty to do such things, and weren't they
|
||
afraid of getting caught? Geoff said, a little to quickly, that no, the
|
||
four of them...... He suddenly realized what he was saying, and went quiet.
|
||
Mr. Walters said Oh, there were four of them were there? and suggested that
|
||
the other two were Peter Jenkins and Frank Smith. The look of shame on
|
||
Jeremy's face told the man he was right. He had suspected the four of them
|
||
for a long time, ever since they had all become such good friends. He set
|
||
the boys' fears to rest, however, when he told them that he wouldn't tell
|
||
anyone about them, in fact he had done the same when he had been a
|
||
schoolboy. Jeremy asked if that was when he had been in short trousers.
|
||
Mr. Walters asked him how he knew, and the boy told him about the
|
||
photograph on the old year book. Mr. Walters told the boys that he and the
|
||
boy next to him in the picture had been best friends, and that they had
|
||
often done the same things as them, and even more. He asked the boys if
|
||
they had put their winkles up each others' bottoms. From the downcast faces
|
||
and silence, he could tell that they had. He told them that they were not
|
||
to be afraid of him, and in fact, if they ever wanted somewhere quiet to go
|
||
for some fun, the four of them, then they should come and see him in his
|
||
room. It was a lot safer there, less chance of being caught, and anyway, he
|
||
would like to see what they did to each other.
|
||
|
||
He told them that he also liked to have fun with boys, and if they wanted
|
||
him to join in, he would, but otherwise he would leave them on their own,
|
||
or maybe just watch. He had continued to wank the boys' willies all the
|
||
time he had been talking to them, and almost as one, he felt the boys
|
||
shudder as they spent themselves into his hands, the boy-juice trickling
|
||
through his fingers onto their naked, boyish thighs. The man could also
|
||
feel a warm, sticky patch, spreading out inside his own underpants, the
|
||
effect of masturbating two naked schoolboys had made him come too, right
|
||
into his pants.
|
||
|
||
He let go of the boys, and wiped his hands across the top of the trunk. He
|
||
told the boys that they had better get dressed now, and go down to dinner.
|
||
He watched them as they donned their school togs, and when they were tidy,
|
||
the three of them climbed back down the winding staircase from the attic.
|
||
He left them at the bottom of the stairs, telling them not to forget what
|
||
he had told them. The two boys grinned at the teacher, telling him they
|
||
jolly well wouldn't. They ran back down the corridor to the dormitory to
|
||
tell Peter and Frank what had happened.
|
||
|
||
When they found the other two boys, they could hardly believe it. They
|
||
thought that Geoff and Jeremy were having them on. But the boys said no, it
|
||
was true, and they could ask Mr. Walters if they didn't believe them. Peter
|
||
said Oh, sure, we'll just walk up to him and say, "Did you toss off Geoff
|
||
and Jeremy?", not bloody likely. Jeremy said well why not?
|
||
|
||
Peter said in answer to that that there were easier ways to get expelled
|
||
than that, and anyway he didn't want to be. Geoff could see that it was
|
||
going to be very difficult to convince them. He would just have to find
|
||
some other way.
|
||
|
||
The opportunity arose about two days later. Geoff had said something to
|
||
Mr. Walters the previous evening, and the teacher had said he would sort
|
||
something out.
|
||
|
||
That day, All four boys had their House Master for geography. When the
|
||
lesson started, the teacher told the class that they were to have an
|
||
impromptu test. He gave out some sheets of paper, and told the boys that
|
||
they had thirty minutes to complete it. Peter and Frank were not to know
|
||
that they had been given different papers to the ones the rest of the class
|
||
had got, ans they struggled through them, squirming as they noticed how
|
||
fast the other boys appeared to be completing the paper. They were also not
|
||
to know that some of the questions on their papers were taken from an old
|
||
"A" level examination, making it almost impossible for them to either
|
||
finish it in time, or get it right.
|
||
|
||
At the end of the thirty minutes, Mr. Walters collected the papers. He
|
||
could see that neither Peter nor Frank were anywhere near finished, and he
|
||
knew that his plan had worked. He pretended to mark the papers whilst the
|
||
boys sat nervously awaiting their results. Just as the lesson finished, he
|
||
said that most of the class had done very well, but that Peter and Frank
|
||
should wait to see him at the end of the lesson.
|
||
|
||
When the bell rang for break, the two boys went up to the teacher's desk.
|
||
He told them that they had not done very well at all in the test, and that
|
||
they had better come to his room that afternoon and collect some extra
|
||
studies from him. The two boys looked at each other. They had little enough
|
||
time as it was to finish their project, and extra studies would mean that
|
||
they had even less time. They left the room, rather deflated.
|
||
|
||
When they were out in the corridor, Peter said that at least it had proved
|
||
one thing, Geoff and Jeremy must have been having them on, or the teacher
|
||
wouldn't have given them extra work. Frank agreed, and said he would never
|
||
believe anything Geoff told him, ever again. The two boys walked out to the
|
||
quad.
|
||
|
||
That afternoon, after prep, the two boys made their way over to Mr.
|
||
Walters' room. They knocked on the door, and heard the teacher call to them
|
||
to come in. Were they amazed at what they saw when they entered the room!
|
||
The teacher was sat on the edge of his bed, dressed in nothing but his gown
|
||
and mortar board with Geoff and Jeremy in their underpants, sat on his lap!
|
||
And the two boys were busy rubbing the House Master's willy!
|
||
|
||
Mr. Walters told them to take off their uniforms and come and join them.
|
||
The two boys could hardly believe it, but they needed no further prompting.
|
||
They stripped of their blazers, pulled off their shoes and socks, removed
|
||
their ties, shirts and vests, dropped their shorts and went over to the
|
||
bed, dressed as the other two, in only their little Y-front briefs.
|
||
|
||
Mr. Walters told Geoff and Jeremy to sit on the bed, and he pulled Peter
|
||
and Frank onto his lap. He made short work of taking the boy's winkles out,
|
||
and was soon pumping them slowly in his hands. He said that he had been
|
||
told that they had not believed his offer, and he had had to find some
|
||
excuse for getting them to come, and so he had rigged the test. The two
|
||
boys said that they didn't really mind, and grinned. This was much more fun
|
||
than geography. The teacher presently stopped wanking them, and asked the
|
||
four of them what they usually did together. The four boys found it
|
||
difficult to put into words, and so the teacher told them to show him. The
|
||
boys quickly stripped of their Y-fronts and formed the same chain that they
|
||
had first made down at the ducker.
|
||
|
||
They were a bit self conscious at first, but soon they gave no thought to
|
||
the fact that they were being watched as their joy overtook them. Mr.
|
||
Walters made one difference to the formation though, when his mouth took
|
||
the place of Jeremy's hand as he slid his body between Peter and Jeremy's
|
||
legs to suck Geoff's willy. Once again, almost as if by plan, the boys came
|
||
at the same time, and the teacher joined in as enthusiastically, swallowing
|
||
Geoff's boy-cum down his throat as he shot his load into the carpet. When
|
||
they had all recovered a little, Mr. Walters asked the boys if they minded
|
||
his being with them. They agreed as one that they didn't mind in the least.
|
||
|
||
The four boys had loads of fun for the next hour or so, romping around
|
||
naked with the house master, until he reminded them that it was getting
|
||
late and they had better get back to their dorm, before lights out. The
|
||
boys hurriedly got dressed and, after thanking the teacher, went happily
|
||
back to their dormitory, exhausted, but content.
|
||
CHAPTER THIRTY-ONE
|
||
|
||
It was open day. The display projects had been judged, and Peter, Geoff,
|
||
Frank and Jeremy had won two first prizes for their work. One prize was for
|
||
originality, as apparently no-one had ever done a history of the school
|
||
before, and the other was for depth of study. The was so much detail in
|
||
their work, and so much of it, that it was impossible to see the board that
|
||
the work was mounted on. There were photographs, essays on the school, past
|
||
and present, and also a sort of roll of honor, showing prominent old-boys,
|
||
and the positions they had attained since leaving the school. There were a
|
||
few leaders of industry, numerous Members of Parliament, and even two
|
||
Consul-Generals.
|
||
|
||
Although the work was judged on its' merits by the teachers, many of the
|
||
parents also commented on the presentation, and at the height of the days'
|
||
events, the four boys were presented to the parents gathered in the main
|
||
hall. As the boys climbed up to the stage, they could feel every adult eye
|
||
on them. They could also hear the comments made by those closest to them.
|
||
All the comments they caught were appertaining to their dress. Some parents
|
||
looked vaguely surprised by the boys' short trousers, but the comments were
|
||
in no way derogatory.
|
||
|
||
The headmaster presented the boys, and commented on their hard work and
|
||
ingenuity. He also made reference to the fact that Jeremy was one of the
|
||
newest boys at the school, and should be especially congratulated on his
|
||
efforts. The boys felt a little embarrassed by all the congratulations they
|
||
were receiving, and made a speedy exit from the stage as soon as they were
|
||
able. As they walked through the hall, quite a few grown ups said how good
|
||
their work was, and asked how long it had taken them. Peter, as spokesman
|
||
for the group told each inquirer how long it had taken, where they had got
|
||
the idea from, and where they had got their information from. Everyone
|
||
seemed very impressed.
|
||
|
||
As none of the four boys parents had turned up for the open day, the boys
|
||
spent the rest of the day just wandering around. They were not involved in
|
||
any of the sporting or arts events, so they basically had the time to
|
||
themselves. The walked around the school, trying to keep out of the way, so
|
||
as not to have to keep on explaining to people about their exhibit, which
|
||
by now was getting a little monotonous.
|
||
|
||
At one stage in the afternoon, the boys saw a large group of parents, all
|
||
talking to the Headmaster. They heard Dr. Edwardes say to one parent
|
||
something about discipline, and the parents concerned had asked about the
|
||
possibility, and they caught a further few words as he answered another
|
||
enquiry about size and availability. They could not make out what the
|
||
discussion was about, and anyway it didn't sound very interesting, so they
|
||
crept quietly away, unobserved.
|
||
|
||
By the time the end of the day came, most of the boys at the school were
|
||
glad to see the last of the parents leaving. True, there had been a few
|
||
emotional goodbyes from some of the younger boys, but on the whole it was
|
||
nice to get back to some sort of organization. The boys were expected by
|
||
the teachers to be on their best behavior, although that idea seemed quite
|
||
strange to most of the boys. After all, if their parents didn't know what
|
||
they were like, who did?
|
||
|
||
After late dinner, the boys made their way back to the dorm. It had been a
|
||
tiring day, and all they were interested in was getting to bed. The other
|
||
boys were a little short with them as they got ready for bed, mainly due to
|
||
jealousy that they had been the center of attention, and also a bit of
|
||
resentment, caused by the fact that the other boys parents had been getting
|
||
at them for their efforts. It seemed that every boy's parents had expected
|
||
them to do better, but Peter argued with them that not everyone could get a
|
||
first. But there seemed no way to win that argument, so after a while they
|
||
just ignored it, and settled down to sleep.
|
||
|
||
The next day, everything was pretty much back to normal. Lessons went on
|
||
as if the previous day had never happened. But one thing had seemed to
|
||
change. The four boys became aware that all of the teachers during the day
|
||
appeared to be assessing them, and their work. They couldn't explain
|
||
exactly what was wrong, they just had this feeling that more attention was
|
||
being paid to them than usual.
|
||
|
||
This went on for about three weeks, and then everything seemed to go back
|
||
to normal. The four friends no longer felt that they were being watched all
|
||
the time. They felt more comfortable again, and that lunchtime, they
|
||
decided to see if Mr. Walters wanted them to go to his room that evening.
|
||
As they had Geography that afternoon, Peter said that it would probably be
|
||
the best time to ask him. During the lesson, the boys found it very
|
||
difficult to concentrate on the lesson, they couldn't wait for the bell to
|
||
ring. Eventually it did, and as the rest of the boys filed out of the room,
|
||
Peter and Jeremy made their way up to the teacher's desk. He asked them
|
||
what they wanted, and when they told him, he smiled and said certainly they
|
||
could come and see him, straight after dinner.
|
||
|
||
That evening, the four boys fairly rushed their dinner. As soon as the
|
||
Masters had risen from table, the boys rushed from the dining room,
|
||
straight up to their House Master's room. They knocked on the door, but
|
||
there was no answer. Jeremy tried the door, and found that it was unlocked.
|
||
He suggested that they go in and wait for Mr. Walters, but Peter said that
|
||
it wasn't a good idea, just in case someone else came in to see the teacher
|
||
while they were waiting for him. It might cause all sorts of problems. They
|
||
decided to go back to the dorm, and return in a few minutes.
|
||
|
||
When they returned, they saw a light shining under the door, and so they
|
||
knocked and waited for a reply. Mr. Walters opened the door, and quietly
|
||
ushered them in. He closed the door, locked it, and then turned to face
|
||
them. He looked a little strange, Peter thought.
|
||
|
||
Mr. Walters stood there for quite a while, just staring at them. Jeremy
|
||
asked what the matter was. The teacher said that it was nothing, smiling to
|
||
himself. He said one thing, though, that really startled the boys.
|
||
Apparently, at the open day, many parents had asked a great deal of
|
||
questions about the four of them. It seemed that many of the parents had
|
||
been very impressed with their standard of work, and that the general
|
||
feeling had been that it was due to their uniform. The boys looked puzzled,
|
||
so Mr. Walters told them to sit down, and he explained.
|
||
|
||
The teacher explained that the impression most of the parents had got of
|
||
them had been that they worked harder than the other boys who were in long
|
||
trousers, and had put it down to discipline. Many of the other boys parents
|
||
had asked around the other teachers, and they had all admitted that since
|
||
the three boys had been put back into shorts, that their work had
|
||
definitely improved. whether due to the uniform change they had not said,
|
||
but a great many of the parents had drawn their own conclusions. They had
|
||
also asked the Headmaster if it were possible to have their boys wear
|
||
shorts. Peter's face fell. It had been bad enough, taking all the stick
|
||
when he had been put into shorts himself. He could just imagine what sort
|
||
of trouble he and the other three would have if it were thought that it was
|
||
their fault that other boys would have to were them as well!
|
||
|
||
Peter became even more worried by what Mr. Walters said next. He told the
|
||
boys that Dr Edwardes had been asked by so many of the parents that he had
|
||
sent out a letter to every parent, asking their opinion. Almost all of them
|
||
had been in favour of the idea, so it had been decided to re-install the
|
||
old uniform code. That meant every boy, up to the fifth form, would wear
|
||
shorts, with the parents having the option to continue the regime with
|
||
their boy, right the way through to the sixth form, if they wanted. The
|
||
four boys groaned. It had been bad enough when they had thought that the
|
||
boys their age or younger would have to wear shorts, but they could just
|
||
imagine what the sixth formers would do to them, if any of their parents
|
||
were to insist they wear shorts too! Peter told the teacher what he was
|
||
thinking.
|
||
|
||
Mr. Walters said that there was nothing to worry about. The changes would
|
||
not be made until the next school year, which meant that many of the sixth
|
||
form would have left the school. Also because it would in effect be a
|
||
school rule, then none of the boys would be able to blame them, as their
|
||
own parents had opted for the change. Peter was still unconvinced. He was
|
||
sure that they would be in for it in September. He asked the teacher when
|
||
the change would be announced. The house-master told him that it would not
|
||
be announced until the end of the summer term, and then the parents would
|
||
be notified by letter, probably just before the start of the summer
|
||
holidays.
|
||
|
||
Peter relaxed a little, at least none of the boys would find out until the
|
||
hols. That was a relief.
|
||
|
||
Mr. Walters told the boys that he thought they would have been overjoyed
|
||
to hear the news, after all they would no longer be the odd ones out. And
|
||
think of all those shorts just begging to have hands thrust up!
|
||
|
||
That thought alone was enough to take the boys' minds off of possible
|
||
problems. They imagined all sorts of things for the next year, and soon the
|
||
four of them were feeling randy as hell, and hands began to roam down to
|
||
grey cloth.
|
||
|
||
The teacher said that he had to go out for a moment, but that he would get
|
||
back as quickly as possible. None of the boys caught the wicked gleam in
|
||
his eye as he left the room and locked the door behind him. They were all
|
||
far too busy undoing their clothing.
|
||
|
||
Mr. Walters had got a surprise for them. They were not the first boys he
|
||
had taken up to his room. There was another boy who had been there on many
|
||
occasions, and now was the time for him to get together with the others. He
|
||
found the boy emerging from his dorm. After telling him that there was
|
||
something he wished to show the boy, he swiftly took the boy back to his
|
||
room.
|
||
|
||
You could not possibly imagine the reaction when Mr. Walters got the boy
|
||
back to his room. He had taken him in through the back entrance into the
|
||
kitchen, and told him to strip off his clothes. When the boy had done so,
|
||
laying his uniform neatly out on the draining board, Mr. Walters told him
|
||
to go into the other room while he made a pot of tea. The boy quite
|
||
innocently opened the door and walked in.
|
||
|
||
Peter stared, stunned at the naked boy stood in the doorway. It was Bill
|
||
Marsh. And he had no clothes on!
|
||
|
||
Marsh too, was stunned. He couldn't believe what he saw. He had wondered
|
||
why Mr. Walters had come in the back way, but now he knew. He saw Geoff
|
||
bent forwards, with Jeremy right up behind him, arms around his waist,
|
||
jerking the other boy off. Peter was stood with his underpants on, his
|
||
willy poking out of the opening and into Frank's mouth. He turned round to
|
||
face the teacher.
|
||
|
||
Mr. Walters was grinning from ear to ear. He did not know of the bad
|
||
feeling between the boys, or the effect getting them all together would
|
||
have. He gently pushed the boy further into the room, until he was sat on
|
||
the bed. Taking hold of Bill's willy, he slowly pushed the boy backwards
|
||
until he was laid, prostrate on the edge of the bed. He then called to
|
||
Peter, who by now was rock hard due to Frank's ministrations, to come over
|
||
to the bed.
|
||
|
||
Peter knew instantly what was expected of him as the man lifted Bill's
|
||
legs up over his head, exposing his bum hole. He shoved a tube of cream at
|
||
Peter, who quickly undid the cap and spread a great blob of cream on the
|
||
end of his willy. He stood at the edge of the bed, and gently thrust it
|
||
into the beckoning opening, slowly pressing it against the muscles in the
|
||
other boy's bottom until they relaxed, almost swallowing his cock to the
|
||
hilt.
|
||
|
||
Bill screamed in ecstasy as he felt his bottom being penetrated by Peter.
|
||
He felt angry at the teacher for not warning him, but this was replaced by
|
||
the thrusting in and out of his up until now virgin hole. He could feel
|
||
Peter's willy sliding in and out of him, and winced as it pressed further
|
||
and further into his bum. He could also feel a stirring in his loins as his
|
||
own willy rose to the occasion. He had never imagined the feeling of
|
||
another boy's cock up there, setting every nerve in his body tingling. He
|
||
felt as if he wanted to pee, and said as much to the House master who was
|
||
holding onto his legs. In reply, the teacher told him to take hold of his
|
||
legs, and when the boy had done so, leaned forwards and took the whole of
|
||
the boy's winkle into his hot, moist mouth. He ran his lips up and down the
|
||
shaft of the captive boy-sex.
|
||
|
||
Frank, who had lost his meal, had got up and was now knelt in front of
|
||
Geoff, busily emulating the teacher's actions on his friend. Geoff moaned
|
||
as he came into his friend's hungry, sucking mouth, triggered off by
|
||
Jeremy's thick creamy juice shooting it's way up inside his bum.. The three
|
||
boys turned to see Peter reaching forward to unzip the teacher's trousers
|
||
and release the man's cock, guiding it down to Bill Marsh's lips. Bill,
|
||
with an obviously practiced talent, started to flick his tongue across the
|
||
broad tip of the House Master's cock, sending the man into spasms of
|
||
pleasure. But the teacher had other ideas. He called to the other three
|
||
boys to come and take his place. Frank sat on the boys face, his willy
|
||
firmly in place in Bill's mouth, whilst Geoff took over attending to his
|
||
cock, not as expertly as the teacher had done, but still well enough to
|
||
keep the other boy squirming with joy.
|
||
|
||
Jeremy meanwhile had got some ideas of his own. He stood beside Peter and
|
||
started tickling Bill's balls. This had a great effect on Bill, making him
|
||
writhe even more, sending him to never before known heights of rapture. His
|
||
whole body was now afire, every nerve screaming out for more. He was so far
|
||
gone that he didn't even flinch as Frank emptied his essence of boyhood
|
||
into his mouth. He just swallowed the lot, his sucking mouth draining every
|
||
drop Frank could give. He didn't even feel the powerful thrust as Peter
|
||
shot his load into him. He could only feel the slow, almost painful build
|
||
up of pressure as his balls worked overtime, producing what must have been
|
||
the strongest orgasm he had ever experienced. He shot jet after jet of
|
||
boy-cum out his willy, straight into the waiting mouth of Geoff.
|
||
|
||
By the time the last dribble had left his body, Bill was totally
|
||
exhausted, he just lay there on the bed, smiling, as the four boys looked
|
||
down at him. They had all been so intent on their pursuits that they hadn't
|
||
even noticed the flashes from Mr. Walters' Polaroid camera, as he had taken
|
||
several shots of the boys, from all different angles. He loved to watch
|
||
boys enjoying themselves, and there was just too much sheer lustiness to
|
||
let the moment pass unrecorded. He waited until the boys had all recovered,
|
||
and then asked them if they would like some tea. All five boys said yes,
|
||
sitting up on the bed. Peter no longer felt any animosity to Bill, and the
|
||
other boy couldn't even remember why he had felt so badly towards Peter.
|
||
All he knew was that he had found new heights of delight with the other
|
||
boys, and no matter what happened, he would never despise any of them again
|
||
for taking him there.
|
||
|
||
Mr. Walters reappeared with a tray and set it on the table. He called the
|
||
boys over to get their tea. The five of them saw the pictures, and felt
|
||
very randy seeing themselves portrayed in such an erotic manner. As they
|
||
stood looking at the photographs, their hands went down to each other's now
|
||
flaccid members, just feeling in a friendly sort of way, the so called
|
||
forbidden parts of the others' bodies. Bill, now feeling a lot more at
|
||
ease, asked Peter about the half term holiday. He said that Evans had
|
||
promised to send him some of the photographs, but that they had never
|
||
turned up. Peter, a little abashed, said that they had arrived, but he had
|
||
taken them, fearful of what Bill might have done with them.
|
||
|
||
Mr. Walters asked what photographs they were on about. Peter, Frank and
|
||
Geoff felt they could trust the teacher, and told him about the day that
|
||
they had been caught by Bill and Steven Evans. Mr. Walters said that he
|
||
wouldn't mind seeing them, and Peter told the teacher that he would give
|
||
them to him. He had forgotten that Raymond was in them as well!
|
||
|
||
Bill asked Peter what had happened to the uniforms. His eyes lit up when
|
||
he heard that the boys had got them at school. He asked then if he could
|
||
wear one of them, the next time they all met together. Mr. Walters said
|
||
that would be a great idea, especially as he had some plans that the boys
|
||
might enjoy. He said he wouldn't tell them any more at the moment, but
|
||
would say more when he had a better idea about it. One thing he did ask
|
||
though, was how many uniforms there were. When he was told three, he said
|
||
nothing, but the five boys had a sneaking suspicion that they might just
|
||
end up with one each.
|
||
|
||
When they had finished the tea, the boys got dressed again, and said
|
||
goodbye to the teacher. Mr. Walters asked Peter if he happened to have a
|
||
spare pair of shorts he could lend Bill for next time. Peter said he had
|
||
some, and caught Bill's look of pleasure when he said that Bill could come
|
||
back with them and get them. Four of the five boys, however, knew that he
|
||
would not have to borrow them for long!
|
||
|
||
CHAPTER THIRTY-TWO
|
||
|
||
The next day, Peter asked Raymond if he could have the photographs. The
|
||
prefect asked why, and Peter told him that they had made it up with Bill
|
||
Smith, and he wanted to show him the pictures. Raymond said he didn't know,
|
||
he didn't really trust the boy. Peter tried to think of some way he could
|
||
convince the prefect, but he couldn't exactly tell him about the previous
|
||
night. In the end he asked Ray to come to the dorm at lunchtime, and he
|
||
could see for himself. The older boy said o.k, and Peter rushed off to find
|
||
Bill, calling back to Ray as he ran not to forget to bring the pictures.
|
||
|
||
That lunchtime found Peter and Bill waiting for the prefect in Peter's
|
||
dorm. Peter had got Bill to put on a pair of shorts, and when the prefect
|
||
walked in, you can imagine the sight he saw. Peter was sat on the edge of
|
||
the bed, with Bill's face buried in his shorts. Both boys looked up,
|
||
smiling as the prefect quietly closed the door. He sat down next to Peter,
|
||
and spread his legs, indicating to Bill to take care of him. The boy
|
||
crawled between his legs and undid the prefect's fly, took out his cock and
|
||
began sucking it. Ray was convinced. He reached inside his blazer pocket
|
||
and took out the envelope and handed it to Peter, telling him to be careful
|
||
with it. Peter said he would be, and stuffed it into his trousers pocket.
|
||
|
||
Ray put his hands on Bill's head and slowly worked his hips backwards and
|
||
forwards, fucking the boy's mouth with his prick. It didn't take long
|
||
before he was shooting his sperm into the boy's receptive mouth. He then,
|
||
quite impersonally stood up, did up his trousers and left the dorm, without
|
||
even a backward glance.
|
||
|
||
Peter told Bill to get changed back into his longs, and when he had done
|
||
so, he took the envelope out of his pocket. He gave the letter and envelope
|
||
to the boy, and showed him the pictures. He said that as he had to see Mr.
|
||
Walters that afternoon, he would keep hold of them and give them to the
|
||
teacher later.
|
||
|
||
Bill looked longingly at the pictures. He told Peter that he never really
|
||
disliked him, but that Evans had bullied him a bit, and so he had just gone
|
||
along with him. Peter told the boy that it was all right, and anyway it was
|
||
over now, 'cos Evans was no longer at the school. That reminded Bill, and
|
||
he took out The envelope and read the letter. When he had finished, he
|
||
asked Peter if he had read it. Peter said that he hadn't, and bill passed
|
||
it over to him. He started to read it, and then suddenly burst out
|
||
laughing. Bill asked him what was so funny.
|
||
|
||
Peter said he had just read the bits about the "naughty little boys" and
|
||
"little babies in short trousers" and found it funny, thinking about what
|
||
had just happened. But the best was yet to come. Peter nearly split his
|
||
sides when he got to the end of the letter. Bill asked again what was so
|
||
funny. Peter said he had just read the bit where Steven said that his
|
||
father would only be up in Yorkshire for a few months after all, so he
|
||
would be coming back to St. Matthews in September. Bill asked what was so
|
||
funny about that. Peter told him about what the teacher had told them about
|
||
the uniform change. Bill couldn't control his laughter, and creased up,
|
||
thinking about Steven as, how had he put it, a "naughty little baby in
|
||
short trousers". Bill told Peter that he couldn't wait to see Evans' face
|
||
when he returned to the school. He told Peter that, before Evans had left,
|
||
both he and Steven used to go to Mr. Walters' room every week for cock-fun.
|
||
That was why they had been so rotten about his shorts, they were making
|
||
sure nobody had any ideas about them.
|
||
|
||
Peter suggested that maybe they could all get him when he came back next
|
||
term. Bill said he would like that, especially if they got the chance to
|
||
ambush him. Peter said he would think how they could do it over the
|
||
holidays. Just then the bell went for afternoon lessons. The two of them
|
||
left the dorm, and went down to the classrooms.
|
||
|
||
During the afternoon break, Peter went to see Mr. Walters. He told the
|
||
House Master that he had got the photographs, and should he bring them to
|
||
his room after school. The teacher said yes, and to bring the others with
|
||
him, as he had a surprise for them all, adding that they should bring their
|
||
cub uniforms with them. Peter thought he could guess what the surprise was.
|
||
He left the Master's study and went to find the others. That afternoon, as
|
||
soon as lessons were over for the day, The five boys went up to Mr.
|
||
Walters' room. Peter, Geoff and Frank had slipped on their cub jerseys
|
||
under their shirts, and had hidden their scarves, caps and garter tabs in
|
||
their blazer pockets. Mr. Walters let them into his room, and closed the
|
||
door. He asked the boys if they had brought the uniforms. In answer to his
|
||
question, the three boys took off their Blazers and shirts, and put on the
|
||
scarves, caps and garters. The teacher told Jeremy and Bill to take off
|
||
their blazers and shirts too. When they had done so, he handed both boys a
|
||
bag. Inside were the cub jerseys and caps that they had expected, and also
|
||
there were five scarves. Jeremy asked why so many. Mr. Walters said that
|
||
they would find out soon enough. He handed the extra scarves to the three
|
||
other boys, and by the time they had swapped them for their own, the other
|
||
two boys were dressed.
|
||
|
||
Mr. Walters told the boys to stand in a line, so he could look them over.
|
||
He noticed how young they all looked, dressed as little cub scouts. They
|
||
could easily pass for nine years old. At least he hoped so!
|
||
|
||
He told the boys to put on their school clothes over their cub uniforms.
|
||
Peter asked why, and was firmly told to wait and find out. When the boys
|
||
were ready, Bill having finished last as he had to put long trousers on
|
||
over his shorts, Mr. Walters said that they were going to go out of school
|
||
for a while.
|
||
|
||
The boys were delighted. They imagined that they were going to probably go
|
||
to some woods or something and pretend to be cubs. Well at least they were
|
||
partly right. They would certainly be expected to behave like cub scouts,
|
||
but for a totally different reason.
|
||
|
||
The teacher led them out of his room, and down the Masters' staircase.
|
||
This was a great honor for the boys. as only the Headmaster and his staff
|
||
were normally allowed to use it. When they reached the ground floor, he
|
||
took them through the back of the school to where the teachers parked their
|
||
cars. He led them over to his car, a big Peugeot Estate. He opened the back
|
||
door, and reached in. He pulled a lever, and as he pulled on what looked
|
||
like part of the floor of the car, the boys noticed it was in fact more
|
||
seats. There were now two main seats in the front, what had been the back
|
||
seat, and another seat behind that.
|
||
|
||
He told the boys to climb into the back as he let himself into the
|
||
driver's door. When the boys were in, he shut the back door, got in the
|
||
car, and started the car. He drove right the way around the perimeter of
|
||
the school playing fields, and out the back gate. At no time had anyone
|
||
seen them leave.
|
||
|
||
After they had been driving for about five minutes, he told the boys to
|
||
take of their school uniforms. The five boys quickly took their togs off,
|
||
Bill once again being the slowest due to his longs, but eventually all five
|
||
boys were sat in the back of the car in just their cub uniforms. Mr.
|
||
Walters told the boys to pass their blazers and shirts and ties forwards,
|
||
and when they had done so, he bundled them all into a sports-bag he had on
|
||
the passenger seat.
|
||
|
||
He drove for about five more minutes, and then pulled up outside a house.
|
||
He told the boys to stay in the car whilst he went in to see someone. When
|
||
he had gone into the house, the boys started asking each other what they
|
||
thought was happening. Everyone asked Peter if he knew anything, but he was
|
||
as much in the dark as they were.
|
||
|
||
Just then the door opened again, and Mr. Walters and another man came out
|
||
of the house, shutting the door behind them. As the house had a high hedge
|
||
around it, all they could see at first was the heads of the two men as they
|
||
walked down the path. They saw the other man look at them as they walked
|
||
towards the car, and the boys heard him say that they should be all right,
|
||
as if he hadn't known himself, he wouldn't have been able to tell. The boys
|
||
wondered what he meant, but not for long. As the two men came out of the
|
||
front gate, the boys noticed that they were both wearing Scout Leaders
|
||
uniforms. The two men got into the car and Mr. Walters drove off down the
|
||
lane.
|
||
|
||
As they were driving along, Mr. Walters spoke to the boys. He told them
|
||
that the man next to him was a friend of his, and that they were to call
|
||
him Skip. Peter asked why, but all that Mr. Walters would say was that they
|
||
would soon find out. He also told them that if anyone asked how old they
|
||
were they were to say that they were ten and a half. The boys thought that
|
||
there was something very odd going on.
|
||
|
||
At last Mr. Walters stopped the car. The boys saw that they were parked
|
||
outside a hall of some sort. Mr. Walters and Skip got out of the car, and
|
||
the teacher opened the back door to let them out. The boys noticed that the
|
||
teacher had a camera in his hand, but thought nothing of it.
|
||
|
||
The two men walked down a path towards the hall. As the boys got nearer
|
||
they could see that it was a scout hut. Skip opened the door and waved the
|
||
boys through.
|
||
|
||
When the boys got inside, they saw a lot of scouts were already inside the
|
||
hut. Skip called the troop to order.
|
||
|
||
As soon as the troop were on parade, Skip called the five boys to the
|
||
front of the hall. Skip told the scouts that they were five cubs who would
|
||
soon be joining the troop, as soon as they passed their Link Badge test.
|
||
The five friends were a little surprised to hear that. They wondered what
|
||
was going to happen.
|
||
|
||
Skip announced that as they were soon to join the troop, it might be an
|
||
idea if they came to the scout meetings from now on. Mr. Walters called
|
||
over from the back of the hall that that would be fine. Skip then went on
|
||
to say that for the moment they could join in, just to get an idea what
|
||
scouts was like. He told the boys to stand at the side of the room, and he
|
||
started the evening's meeting.
|
||
|
||
The rest of the meeting, Peter, Frank, Geoff, Jeremy and Bill joined in
|
||
with the other boys. A couple of times one of the scouts asked them how old
|
||
they were, but having been primed, the boys just said that they were ten
|
||
and a half, and that seemed to satisfy the scouts.
|
||
|
||
At the end of the evening however, the boys were in for another surprise.
|
||
Skip had just finished the meeting, and the five friends thought that they
|
||
would be going back to school, but Skip still had an ace up his sleeve. He
|
||
turned to the scouts and said that he was leaving, and suggested that the
|
||
scouts could initiate the new boys when he had gone. The scouts cheered,
|
||
and as soon as the two men left the hut, made a grab for the five friends.
|
||
|
||
The five boys were by now quite worried. Mr. Walters had left, and they
|
||
didn't know how they were to get back to school. But they had more
|
||
immediate problems on their hands. One by one they were stripped and tied
|
||
face down over benches. Then the five patrol Leaders picked up a slipper
|
||
each and started to paddle the boys bums. They continued until all five of
|
||
their bums were bright red.
|
||
|
||
When they decided the boys had had enough of that, they untied them,
|
||
turned them over, and tied them up again, this time so that they were
|
||
positioned one on the end of each bench. Then the scouts formed a circle
|
||
around the boys, five to each boy. All the scouts now undid their trousers
|
||
and dropped them to their knees, and did the same with their pants. They
|
||
began to wank themselves over the top of each boy.
|
||
|
||
Meanwhile the patrol leaders and seconds had taken off their trousers and
|
||
stood one at each end of a boy, in just their scout shirts and underpants.
|
||
The seconds, who were stood at the head of each boy, leant forwards and
|
||
grabbed hold of the boy's legs, pulling them up over their heads. Then they
|
||
slowly squatted down over the boys' faces, pushing their pricks into the
|
||
younger boys mouths.
|
||
|
||
Once each boy was in place, it was the turn of the Patrol Leaders. They
|
||
knelt down and began to fuck each of the boys. To the scouts, this was
|
||
their idea of a strict initiation, designed to find out if the boy could
|
||
take it. However to the five friends, it was fun, they had not imagined
|
||
that afternoon that they would end up getting raped by a group of scouts.
|
||
What a gang bang!
|
||
|
||
When the initiation was well underway, Mr. Walters walked back into the
|
||
hut. None of the boys took any notice of him, but just kept on fucking and
|
||
wanking over the five boys. Mr. Walters took plenty of photographs, both of
|
||
the scouts and of his five pupils, and he was sure that they would enjoy
|
||
looking at the pictures as much as he would.
|
||
|
||
When all the scouts had come, in or over the boys, they untied the five
|
||
friends, and helped them to dress. The Senior Patrol Leader said that they
|
||
were all good sports, and as far as they were concerned, they could join
|
||
the troop any time they liked. They said their goodbyes and left the five
|
||
friends to finish dressing.
|
||
|
||
WHen the boys were ready, Mr. Walters took the boys out to the car, and
|
||
let them get in. Skip, who had been waiting in the car, asked the boys how
|
||
it had gone. As one the boys said that it had been great. He told them that
|
||
if they had enjoyed that, then perhaps they would like to go camping one
|
||
weekend with the rest of the scouts. The five boys all agreed that would be
|
||
a grand idea, and Mr. Walters said he would try to arrange it.
|
||
|
||
After they had dropped Skip off at his house, Mr. Walters took the boys
|
||
back to school. He told them they had better change back into school
|
||
uniform before they got back though, and passed the sports bag over to
|
||
them.
|
||
|
||
Back at school again he took the boys up to his room. He asked them if
|
||
they had enjoyed the evening. All the boys said they had, apart from one
|
||
thing. All the scouts had come off, but they still felt a horny as
|
||
anything, cos they hadn't. Mr. Walters said he could soon fix that, and
|
||
told the boys to strip. Once they were naked, he showed them the pictures
|
||
he had taken. There were a few he had taken earlier in the evening, of them
|
||
in their cub uniforms, but the ones that interested the boys most were the
|
||
ones of them being fucked and spunked over. There was one of Peter with
|
||
boy-juice all over his face, chest and legs. As the boys stood looking at
|
||
the pictures, they were getting so worked up that they just started wanking
|
||
themselves off.
|
||
|
||
In no time all five of them were shooting all over the floor. Mr. Walters
|
||
told them that they would have to pay for getting his carpet dirty, so one
|
||
by one, he had them across his lap, and he gave them six playful taps with
|
||
a slipper. Mind you, he enjoyed it as much as the boys did, for whilst they
|
||
were across his lap, he had each boy wanking him off. By the time the last
|
||
boy had had his six, he too had come. When the boys had dressed again, he
|
||
let them out of his room, telling them to come back the next afternoon,
|
||
when he would have another surprise for them. The boys went back to their
|
||
dorms totally exhausted, wondering what the next surprise would be!
|
||
|
||
CHAPTER THIRTY-THREE
|
||
|
||
The next day, the boys once again we
|
||
|
||
t to Mr. Walters room as soon as lessons had finished. As they arrived, Mr.
|
||
Walters was just opening his door. He let them in and asked them if they
|
||
had brought their uniforms again. The boys said no, and were told to go and
|
||
collect them and meet him in the car park.
|
||
|
||
The boys rushed back to the dormitory and collected their cub uniforms.
|
||
They didn't stop to put them on, but put them in their sports bags and ran
|
||
back out to the car park.
|
||
|
||
Mr. Walters opened the car door and let the boys in. Once again they drove
|
||
out of the back gate, and for a while it looked as if they were going to
|
||
Skip's house again. However the teacher turned off a short way before the
|
||
other man's house, down a different road. They pulled into a lay-by,
|
||
outside a public toilet.
|
||
|
||
Mr. Walters turned round and asked the boys if they had their uniforms on.
|
||
When the boys said no, he told them to go into the toilet and change. The
|
||
boys jumped out of the car and ran over to the toilet. About five minutes
|
||
later the five of them emerged, dressed in their Cub uniforms. They walked
|
||
back over to the car and climbed in.
|
||
|
||
Mr. Walters started the car again and drove on. When he stopped the car
|
||
again, the boys noticed that they were outside the Scout Hut again. Mr.
|
||
Walters told the boys to get out of the car, and go to the hut, while he
|
||
parked the car. The boys walked down the path, and stood outside the door,
|
||
waiting for the teacher.
|
||
|
||
While they were waiting, three more boys turned up, also dressed in Cub
|
||
uniform. They looked at the five friends for a moment, and then walked over
|
||
to them. The older boys hadn't really taken much notice of the new
|
||
arrivals, so you can imagine the shock when one of them walked up to Peter
|
||
and said hello.
|
||
|
||
Peter looked at the boy, and had the surprise of his life. It was Colin,
|
||
one of the boys they had met at half term! Peter felt afraid. He asked
|
||
Colin what he was doing there. The younger boy told him that this was his
|
||
cub pack, and asked in return what Peter and his friends were doing there.
|
||
Peter very shyly told the boy about their house master, and said that they
|
||
were coming to cubs too. Colin said that was great, and he was sure Robert
|
||
and Ian would think so too.
|
||
|
||
Colin told Peter that since the camping holiday, they had got a new Akela.
|
||
Peter felt very relieved; at least no-one would recognize them. Colin also
|
||
whispered into his ear that they had found two more cubs who liked doing
|
||
what they had done at the farm. He asked Peter if He and his friends would
|
||
like to meet them. Peter said it might be nice, but just then Mr. Walters
|
||
walked down the path.
|
||
|
||
Peter was stunned by what happened next. As he got to the door, Colin ran
|
||
over to him, calling out "Hello Uncle George, what are you doing here?"
|
||
Frank and Geoff were just as amazed. Colin called over to the five friends
|
||
to meet his uncle. Mr. Walters told Colin that he already knew them, and
|
||
explained to his nephew that they were his pupils. It was Colin's turn to
|
||
look surprised. He asked his uncle why he had brought the boys here, and
|
||
the teacher tried to explain to his nephew why they were there, trying to
|
||
play down the sexual aspect. Peter could see the problem the House master
|
||
was having, and drew something out of his pocket. He passed it over to the
|
||
man, and said he might like to have a look. Mr. Walters took the packet,
|
||
and opened it. It was the photographs that Steven Evans had taken. The
|
||
teacher's eyes widened as he saw the faces of the people in them. He had no
|
||
idea that his nephew liked that sort of thing! Well that made a big
|
||
difference. He turned to Colin and asked whether the boy had enjoyed the
|
||
holiday, and if he would like to see more of Peter and the other boys. When
|
||
Colin said yes, Mr. Walters said that he would have to arrange an outing
|
||
for them quite soon.
|
||
|
||
By now, the rest of the Cub pack had arrived, and the new Akela opened the
|
||
door to let the boys in. Mr. Walters registered the five boys, as cubs from
|
||
a pack nearby that had closed down. He explained to Akela that the boys
|
||
were nearly old enough to go up to the Scouts, but that they wanted to get
|
||
their Link Badges first, and so would like to join the pack. The Akela said
|
||
that there was no problem, and after taking the boys names, invited them to
|
||
join in. It was made a lot easier by the fact that the boys already knew
|
||
some of the boys in the pack, however if the Akela had known how well the
|
||
boys knew each other, things might have been quite different.
|
||
|
||
At the end of the meeting, Mr. Walters took his five pupils, Colin, Robert
|
||
and Ian, and the two boys his nephew had spoken of earlier, whose names
|
||
were Alan and Andrew, to the local Mcdonalds for tea. The teacher was
|
||
pleased to see how well the boys got on together, and promised himself that
|
||
as soon as he could, he would arrange a camping weekend for the ten, no
|
||
make that eleven boys. He had just remembered the face of the other person
|
||
in the photograph. He should be invited too!
|
||
|
||
When everyone had finished eating, Mr. Walters dropped his nephew and
|
||
friends home, and took the boys back to school. He told them not to get
|
||
changed, but sneaked them up the Masters' staircase to his room. Once back
|
||
there, he asked what they had thought of Cubs. The five boys agreed that
|
||
they had enjoyed it, and would love to go again. Mr. Walters told them that
|
||
from now on, they could go every week, but that he might not be able to
|
||
take them all the time. He told them that they could get a bus from the end
|
||
of the lane that would take them there, but to be careful about changing,
|
||
and not get caught.
|
||
|
||
There was one final thing, however, the teacher went on to say. He was not
|
||
very happy that none of the boys had told him about knowing his nephew. The
|
||
boys said that they hadn't known themselves, but the teacher just told them
|
||
to stop making excuses. He said that they each deserved a spanking for not
|
||
telling him. One by one, he had each boy over his knee, and gave them six
|
||
hearty slaps.
|
||
|
||
When he had finished, he said that they had better change and get going,
|
||
as it was nearly time for them to go to bed. They boys quickly changed back
|
||
into their school uniforms, and when they were all neat and tidy, said
|
||
goodnight to the teacher and returned to their dorms. As they walked back
|
||
together, the boys all agreed that the last couple of days had been great
|
||
fun, but in a way, they missed the times they had spent with just them and
|
||
the teacher. They parted outside Bill's dorm, and when Bill had gone in,
|
||
the four remaining boys went back to their own dorm, and changed for bed,
|
||
each boy hoping that they would find some reason for going to Mr. Walters
|
||
room again!
|
||
|
||
CHAPTER THIRTY-FOUR
|
||
|
||
During the holidays, all the boys spent many happy hours together. They
|
||
went out camping for a week with Mr. Walters and his nephews, all the boys
|
||
dressed of course in Cub uniform. All in all they boys had a thoroughly
|
||
wonderful time. But now it was time to go back to school.
|
||
|
||
The first day back, the five friends could hardly contain themselves. All
|
||
the boys were wandering around in their new short trousers, looking very
|
||
self conscious. Peter was pleased to see Steven Evans looking very
|
||
uncomfortable indeed. Bill was with him, and so was Jeremy. The five of
|
||
them had decided over the hols that the two of them would be friendly to
|
||
Evans, and they would be able to lead him into a trap the first chance they
|
||
got. Peter could not wait.
|
||
|
||
The chance came sooner than they expected. The first Sunday back at school
|
||
was usually a restricted one, with none of the boys allowed out, but for
|
||
some reason this term was different. Bill and Jeremy had talked Evans into
|
||
going out with them in the afternoon, and Steven had agreed.
|
||
|
||
Bill had told Peter the route they would be taking, and so it was that as
|
||
the three boys walked down the lane and into the woods, they were met by
|
||
Peter, Geoff and Frank.
|
||
|
||
Frank started jeering at Steven about being a "little boy in short
|
||
trousers", and the other two boys who were with Evans joined in. Evans
|
||
looked at the boys, who were now in a ring around him, and he suddenly
|
||
realized he had been trapped.
|
||
|
||
Peter said how uncomfortable Steven looked in his "little short trousers",
|
||
and Bill suggested that if he was so uncomfortable in them, perhaps they
|
||
should do him a favour and take them off for him.
|
||
|
||
Steven's hands went down to his shorts as the five boys grabbed hold of
|
||
him. It was true he did feel very self conscious about wearing shorts, but
|
||
at the same time he didn't want to be de-bagged. But struggle as he did, he
|
||
could not stop the boys stripping them off, or his underpants with them.
|
||
|
||
He was even more terrified when he felt his tie being taken from around
|
||
his neck, and used to tie his hands behind his back, and his shoe laces
|
||
tied together so that he could not run away.
|
||
|
||
All five boys picked him up and carried him into the trees. He was thrown
|
||
over fallen tree, his hair brushing against the ground.
|
||
|
||
In this position he saw everything upside down, the woods , the boys, and
|
||
he was horrified as he saw Jeremy produce his cane from underneath his
|
||
blazer.
|
||
|
||
Jeremy gave the boy six stinging cuts on his bare bottom, making the
|
||
captive victim squirm in pain. Peter took over and gave Evans a further
|
||
six. All in all, Steven received thirty strokes as each boy in turn gave
|
||
him six of the best. But there was more in store yet.
|
||
|
||
The boys pulled Steven up off the tree, and rearranged him so that his
|
||
chest rested against the trunk of the tree, his head on a level with the
|
||
other boys' groins. Frank walked round in front of Evans and slowly undid
|
||
his flies. His willy sprang out stiff and firm, slapping itself against
|
||
Steven's cheek.
|
||
|
||
Meanwhile Peter had been busy too. He had dropped his shorts and
|
||
underpants, and was busy anointing his willy with cream. Geoff had also
|
||
dropped his shorts and was sat beneath Steven's body. As one, the three
|
||
boys began their assault on their captive. With no gentleness whatsoever,
|
||
Peter rammed his boy-hood into Steven's bum-hole. Frank pressed his into
|
||
the boys mouth, and Geoff began to suck ferociously on the poor boys now
|
||
rampant willy.
|
||
|
||
As the three boys worked on Evans, both Jeremy and Bill took photographs
|
||
with a Polaroid camera Mr. Walters had given them during the holidays. He
|
||
had told them he wanted to see any interesting photographs they took, and
|
||
the boys were certain that the teacher would find these more than adequate.
|
||
|
||
Peter was the first to shoot, and he emptied himself into Evans' hole.
|
||
Jeremy said he would like a go too, and so as Peter withdrew, the other boy
|
||
was ready to fill the now vacant space.
|
||
|
||
Frank was next to come, filling the boy's mouth with spunk, so much that
|
||
it dribbled down the boys face, and onto his own underpants which had been
|
||
placed there for that reason. The boys had decided that they were going to
|
||
humiliate Steven as much as they could, and decided that making the boy
|
||
spend the rest of the afternoon in underpants soaked with sperm, all sticky
|
||
and warm, was probably the best way to do it.
|
||
|
||
When Evans had finally stopped dribbling, Peter picked up the boys
|
||
Y-fronts and wiped his now soft winkle clean with them. Then He passed them
|
||
to Geoff. Geoff waited until the last moment to remove his mouth from the
|
||
boys throbbing member, and then milked the boy dry into the white cotton
|
||
pants, as Jeremy emptied his load into the boy's bottom.
|
||
|
||
Finally Bill took his turn to get up his friend. The boys had learned over
|
||
the holidays that it was very difficult to keep spunk inside, as no matter
|
||
how hard you tried, it would dribble out of your bottom, and the more there
|
||
was, the faster it came out. So the plan was to fill the boy as full as
|
||
possible, in the knowledge that he would be uncomfortable for the rest of
|
||
the day.
|
||
|
||
When Bill had also released himself, the boys re-dressed Steven, and tied
|
||
him to the tree. They decided to leave him there for the afternoon, and
|
||
return to get him later. They tidied themselves up, and walked, laughing,
|
||
away from the now very subdued boy.
|
||
|
||
They returned to find Steven exactly how they had left him, except that
|
||
there were tears rolling down his cheeks, and the marks of dried spunk
|
||
tracks down the backs of his legs, where it had obviously seeped out of the
|
||
legbands of his underpants. No longer was he the bully, but a cowed, sorry
|
||
looking figure indeed. Peter asked him if he was going to try and cause any
|
||
more trouble. Steven said no, and he was sorry for being so nasty to them
|
||
before.
|
||
|
||
They untied him from the tree, and Peter gave him his handkerchief to wipe
|
||
his face. Then much to Steven's surprise, each boy in turn stepped up and
|
||
kissed him full on the lips and gave his willy a squeeze. This was their
|
||
way of showing their forgiveness, and full acceptance into the happy group.
|
||
|
||
Throughout the rest of their time at school together, the six boys
|
||
remained very close friends, and it will probably not surprise you to hear
|
||
that all six of them left the school on their last day in the sixth form,
|
||
all of them traveling home in short trousers!
|
||
|
||
THE END
|